JP7169571B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine, and more particularly to a technique for improving the performance of a game machine.

In pinball game machines and rotating game machines, liquid crystal display screens, speakers, LEDs, accessories, vibrating bodies, blowers, etc. are used to perform various effects to make the game lively.
The following patent documents disclose techniques for controlling various performance operations.

JP 2014-64693 A

However, in order to realize various effects, the number of substrates has increased, the wiring has become more complicated and difficult, and the accompanying power supply has become more complicated.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to propose a desirable configuration in a game machine in order to alleviate these problems.

A game machine according to the present invention includes a first electrical component to which a performance control signal supplied from another board is input, and a second electrical component to which the performance control signal is branched and is input in parallel with the first electrical component. and a substrate provided with a component, wherein the first electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage and has a terminal for outputting a second voltage lower than the first voltage, the first electrical component is a driver circuit of a rendering device, which is one of a plurality of driver circuits to which different slave addresses are set, the first electric component uses the second voltage for setting its own slave address, and the The second electrical component is connected to a terminal that outputs a second voltage.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize an efficient configuration for dealing with diversified effects.

1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board of the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine of the embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a pre-reading advance notice effect according to the embodiment; 1 is a perspective view of a state in which a door of a game machine of an embodiment is opened; FIG. It is a perspective view of a state in which the inner frame of the gaming machine of the embodiment is opened. It is an explanatory view of the substrate arrangement on the back side of the game board of the embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of board|substrate arrangement|positioning of the door of the gaming machine of embodiment, and an inner frame. It is explanatory drawing of the board|substrate arrangement|positioning of the inner frame of the gaming machine of embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the arrangement of various devices; FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a connection configuration of substrates; 3 is an explanatory diagram of power system inputs and outputs of the power board 300. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of an inner frame LED relay board 400. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of an inner frame LED relay board 400. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the flow of signals in the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the flow of signals in the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of a relay board 550; FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. FIG. It is a circuit diagram of the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit. 6 is a circuit diagram of a side unit upper LED board 630. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of a button LED connection board 640. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of button LED board 660. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram of button LED board 660. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED connection board 700. FIG. is a circuit diagram of the backside left relay board 720 of FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of a decoration substrate 740; FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of a relay board 760; FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram of an LED board 780. FIG. FIG. 11 is a circuit diagram of a backside lower relay board 800; 8 is a circuit diagram of a decorative substrate 820; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an overview of transmission of power supply voltage between boards; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a connector; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of wiring paths between substrates; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of transmission of power supply voltage between substrates; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a power supply system of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a power supply system of the front frame LED connection board 500; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of transmission of power supply voltage between substrates; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of buffers and branching of signals; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a signal path of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of buffers and branching of signals; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of buffers and branching of signals; 7 is a circuit diagram of a modification of the LED board 780. FIG.

Embodiments according to the present invention will be described below in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.
<1. Game Machine Structure>
<2. Game Machine Control Configuration>
[2.1 Main control board]
[2.2 Production control board]
<3. Overview of operation>
[3.1 Symbol variation display game]
[3.2 Game state]
[3.3 Per hit]
[3.4 About production]
<4. Opening/Closing Structure and Substrate Arrangement>
<5. Board Connection Configuration>
[5.1 Connection state of each board]
[5.2 Inner frame LED relay board 400]
[5.3 Front frame LED connection board 500]
[5.4 Relay board 550]
[5.5 Side Unit Upper Right LED Board 600]
[5.6 Side unit lower right LED board 620]
[5.7 LED board 630 on the side unit]
[5.8 Button LED connection board 640]
[5.9 Button LED board 660]
[5.10 LED connection board 700]
[5.11 Board Back Left Relay Board 720]
[5.12 Decorative substrate 740]
[5.13 Relay board 760]
[5.14 LED board 780]
[5.15 Board Back Bottom Relay Board 800]
[5.16 Decorative substrate 820]
<6. Description of Noteworthy Configuration>
[6.1 Serial data signal between inner frame 2 and door 6]
[6.2 Number of power supplies of transmission line H (Part 1)]
[6.3 Connector structure]
[6.4 Wiring route]
[6.5 Number of power supplies of transmission line H (part 2)]
[6.6 Power supply path]
[6.7 Separation of Power Supply Voltage System]
[6.8 Number of power lines and number of ground lines]
[6.9 Buffer and signal branch]
[6.10 Power supply by electric parts]
[6.11 Others]

<1. Game Machine Structure>

The structure of a pachinko game machine 1 as an embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 3 of the pachinko game machine 1.
The pachinko game machine 1 has a frame member, a door member provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame member, and a replacement member attached to the frame member so as to be replaceable.
The pachinko game machine 1 described below has an inner frame 2 as a structure corresponding to a frame member, a door 6 as a structure corresponding to a door member, and a game board 3 as a structure corresponding to a replacement member.

The pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in an attached game board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the inner frame 2. have. Since the game board 3 can be exchangeably attached to and detached from the inner frame 2, it can be called a replacement member.
A door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Also, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

On the front side of the door 6 (on the player's side), a side unit 10 is formed as a decoration unit surrounding all or part of the game board 3, for example.
The side unit 10 itself has a decorative shape that matches the theme of the game machine 1, and may also be provided with performance members such as LEDs and accessories inside, and has a performance effect that conveys the atmosphere of the game to the player. demonstrate. The side unit 10 is a unit attached to the door 6 so as to be replaceable.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the door 6. When a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated to one side, the locked state of the door 6 with respect to the inner frame 2 is released. The door 6 can be opened forward by pressing it, and by operating it to the other side, the locked state of the inner frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 is released and the inner frame 2 can be opened forward.

Under the door 6, a front operation panel 7 is pivotally supported on the inner frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed.
An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

The upper receiving tray unit 8 also has a ball ejection button 14 for ejecting the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and a game ball dispensing device (not shown) for dispensing game balls. A ball lending button 11 for making a request and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.
Also, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a performance button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) when the built-in lamp (button LED 75) is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and a predetermined operation (pressing, repeated hitting, long pressing, etc.) is performed during the lighting of the built-in lamp. By doing so, it is possible to bring about changes in the production.
The upper tray unit 8 also has a cross key 15a for users such as players and hall staff to select various items and give directions, and a determination button 15b for instructing determination of selection items. An operator is provided.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating a firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7 .

Speakers 46 are provided on both sides of the upper portion of the door 6 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15 to produce a sound effect (sound effect). Only the two speakers 46 on the top of the door 6 are shown in FIG.
With a plurality of speakers 46, it is possible to perform so-called stereo sound reproduction and sound reproduction of a larger number of channels for sounds related to performance.

In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, full-color LEDs for light production: see FIG. 3) are provided at appropriate locations on the door 6 to produce a light production effect. A plurality of full-color LEDs (light effect LEDs) and the like as the decorative lamps 45 are provided around the pachinko game machine 1, for example, around the door 6 and inside the side unit 10. FIG.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game board 3 shown in the figure is provided with a ball guiding rail 5 that guides the shot game balls in an annular shape as a board surface partitioning member. The four corners are non-game areas.

Approximately in the center of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative patterns (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently displayed. A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of a left pattern (corresponding to the left display area), a middle pattern (corresponding to the middle display area), and a right pattern (corresponding to the right display area) is provided. is provided.
Under the control of the effect control board 30, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects in the form of images in addition to the variable display operation of decorative symbols.

In the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long way. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and to control the flow of the game ball depending on the strength or stroke length of the game ball's launch. It works as flow path distribution means that enables distribution of the path to the left and right.
In this embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow paths for game balls are formed on both upper sides (left and right sides) of the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. The game balls hit by the shooting device 32 on the upper side of the game area 3a are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and are divided into the left flowing path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and the right flowing path 3c on the right side. flow something.

In addition, the non-game area at the bottom of the game board 3 serves as various function display units, and includes a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) by a dot indicator. display means) are provided.
Various function display units including the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are shown enlarged in FIG.

In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is executed by a variable display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the dot indicator. In the liquid crystal display device 36, in time synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns by the special pattern display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative patterns by images are variably displayed, and decorated with various advance notice effects (effect images). A symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

Also, in the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display device) 38c composed of dot displays like the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b is arranged. Composite is called 5 special patterns 1, 2, display of the number of operation pending balls of normal patterns, state notification during variable time reduction function (during time saving) and during high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a holding/time-saving/high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as "composite display device") having a display function.

In addition, the various function display units are provided with a compound display device 38d, which is also made up of a dot display.
In this composite display device 38d, the number of rounds indicating the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit is displayed by combining the ON/OFF states of the four LEDs. For example, a specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) relating to a big hit is notified by a combination of lighting/lighting-out states of four LEDs.
Further, in the combined display device 38d, a normal symbol variation display game is executed by a normal symbol variation display operation represented by one LED as the normal symbol display.
Further, in the composite display device 38d, right-handed display is performed by three LEDs.

Under the center decoration 48 in FIG. 2, there is provided a normal variable winning device 41 having a starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) inside. Inside the starting hole 34, a detection sensor 34a (starting hole sensor 34a, see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball is formed.
In addition, the right flow path 3c is provided with a starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) that performs opening and closing operation, and a detection sensor 35a (starting A mouth sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) is formed.

The starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases "special symbol 1"). (abbreviated for short)), and is configured as a fixed winning rate type winning device that does not have starting opening/closing means (means for opening or enlarging the starting opening). In this embodiment, due to the action of the game ball fall direction changing member (for example, game nail, windmill 44, center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b to the starting port 34 is a configuration in which it is easy to enter (win a prize), whereas it is difficult or impossible to enter a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c.

The starting port 35 starts the variable display operation of the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2", and in some cases is abbreviated as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b. It is a winning opening according to conditions, and the winning area of the starting opening 35 is configured to be openable and closable between an open state in which winning is possible and a closed state in which winning is impossible.

In addition, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, two general winning openings 43 are provided, each of which is provided with a general winning opening sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball. there is
In addition, a movable accessory (not shown) that exerts a visual performance effect is arranged in the area of the game board at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball.

In addition, diagonally above the normal variable winning device 41, that is, on the upper side of the middle part of the right flow path 3c, there is a normal symbol start port 37 (third start means) are provided. The normal symbol starting port 37 is a prize winning port related to the variable display operation of the normal symbols of the composite display device 38d, and the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passing game ball is installed therein. formed. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b or may be formed in both flow paths.

A special variable winning device 52 (special A large prize winning hole sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 50 is formed inside.
A guide part 55 and a windmill 53 are provided around the big winning hole 50 to bring the falling game balls toward the big winning hole 50 .

The process of entering the game ball into the big winning hole 50 is as follows.
A game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 and has passed through the right flow path 3c is guided toward the big winning opening 50 by the guide part 55. - 特許庁If the large winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is led into the large winning opening 50.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the side of the special variable winning device 52 (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c), the starting port 34 A game ball is difficult or not guided to the side. Therefore, if it is in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible for the normal variable winning device 41 to enter the starting opening .
In addition, the starting port 35 operates in a more advantageous opening/closing pattern than in the normal state when it enters a game state accompanied by a state with an electric sapo, which will be described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, the manner in which the player should hit to obtain an advantageous situation changes according to the game state. Specifically, if the game state is accompanied by the "state without electric sapo", which will be described later, it is advantageous to hit "left", aiming for the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b. If it is a game state accompanied by "with state", "right hitting" aiming to make the game ball pass through the right flow path 3c is advantageous.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, a promise is made for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 starting holes 34 or 35, 13 large winning holes 50, and 10 general winning holes 43) is determined by the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). It is designed to be disbursed from The game balls that have not won the winning openings are ejected from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. FIG.

Here, "winning" means that the winning opening does not have a structure in which the game ball is taken in, or the winning opening is not a structure in which the game ball is taken in, but is a winning opening made up of a pass-through gate (for example, the normal symbol start opening 37). If it is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and in fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning hole, "winning" occurs in that winning hole treated as if A game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning hole, it will be detected by the winning detection switch. Irrespective of this, there are cases where the term "winning" includes the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Game Machine Control Configuration>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing game operation control of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 that controls overall game operations (game operation control), and a production control command received from the main control board 20 to produce production means. A production control board 30 (production control means) that controls the execution control (appearance control) of the production by, a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls, and an external power supply (not shown) ) to generate and supply necessary power to the gaming machine 1 (power supply control means (not shown)).
Note that the power supply route to each part is omitted in FIG.

[2.1 Main control board]
The main control board 20 is equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU (Central Processing Unit) 20a (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program describing game operation control procedures, various data necessary for game operation control are stored. A ROM (Read Only Memory) 20b (main control ROM) for storing data and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 20c (main control RAM) functioning as a work area and buffer memory are installed, and the microcomputer is configured as a whole. .

Although not shown, the main control board 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing periodic interrupts, a constant cycle pulse output generation function (bit rate generator), a time measurement function, and a main control circuit. An interrupt controller circuit that performs an interrupt permission/interrupt prohibition function such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal to the CPU 20a, and an interrupt controller circuit that detects when the power is turned on or off, when the power is turned off, or when the power is abnormal, and outputs a system reset signal for main control. A reset circuit that can reset the CPU 20a, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors abnormal operation of the control program, and a prohibition of traveling outside the designated area that monitors whether the program is being executed correctly within a preset address range. (IAT) circuit, and a counter circuit for generating random numbers within a certain range in terms of hardware.

The counter circuit includes a random number generating circuit for generating random numbers and a sampling circuit for sampling random numbers from the random number generating circuit at predetermined timings, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending instructions to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the main control CPU 20a uses the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as the internal lottery random number (random number for judging a big hit (random number size: 65536)). The random number is obtained and used for the jackpot lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a soft random number generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number, in order to prevent cheating such as hitting a winning game.

The main control board 20 includes a starting hole sensor 34a for detecting winning (entering a ball) to the starting hole 34, a starting hole sensor 35a for detecting winning to the starting hole 35, and a normal symbol starting hole 37 for detecting passage. A normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting winning to the big winning opening 50, a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting winning to the general winning opening 43, and an out opening 49 are discharged. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) is connected, and the main control board 20 can receive detection signals output from these. The main control board 20 can grasp which winning opening the game ball has entered based on the detection signal from each sensor.

The main control board 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing 47 of the starter opening 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. are connected, and the main control board 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. . Furthermore, the main control board 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c, and is capable of transmitting control signals for controlling the display of the pending number and the status display.

A composite display device 38d is connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 outputs a control signal for controlling the normal symbol display, right-handed display, and round display displayed on the composite display device 38d. can be sent.

Further, the main control board 20 is connected to an external common terminal board 21 for frame, and the main control board 20 is connected to the hall computer HC provided outside the game machine via the external common terminal board 21 for frame. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, big hit information, prize ball information, symbol variation execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control board 20 and managing the operational status of the pachinko hall gaming machines in a comprehensive manner.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control board 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command related to payout (number of prize balls A payout control command that specifies ) can be transmitted.

The payout control board 29 is connected with a launch control board (launch control section) 28 that controls the launcher 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of this payout control board 29 are reception of payout control commands from the main control board 20, control of prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control commands, transmission of status signals to the main control board 20, and the like. is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a shortage of supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls (prize balls) to be paid out. can receive each detection signal. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for putting out game balls. of control signals can be transmitted.

Further, the payout control board 29 is provided with a full detection sensor 60 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the state of game balls stored in the upper tray 9) that detects when the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. , a front door open sensor 61 (for example, a detection sensor for detecting the open state of the door 6 or the inner frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control board 20 based on detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the front door open sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This state signal includes a ball clogged signal indicating a full state, a door open signal indicating that at least the inner frame 2 is open, a resupply out signal indicating insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and prize balls. A count error signal indicating an insufficient payout of balls or an abnormality in the ball counting sensor 19b, and a payout completion signal indicating completion of the payout operation are included, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main control board 20 determines whether the inner frame 2 is open (door open error), whether the dispensing operation of the game ball dispensing device 19 is normal (replenishment shortage error), and whether the upper tray 9 is open. Monitor the full state (ball clogging error), etc.

Furthermore, a firing control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a permission signal for permitting firing can be transmitted to the firing control board 28. FIG. The firing control board 28 controls energization of a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the dispensing control board 29, and operates the firing operation handle 15. It realizes the shooting operation of the game ball by. Specifically, it is detected that a firing permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (firing permission signal ON state) and that the player is touching the handle by a touch sensor provided on the firing operation handle 15. On the condition that the shooting stop switch (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 is not operated, the game ball shooting operation is permitted. Therefore, when the shooting permission signal is not output (shooting permission signal OFF state), even if the shooting operation handle 15 is operated, the shooting operation is not executed and the game ball is not shot. In addition, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the shooting operation handle 15. - 特許庁
In addition, when the payout control board 29 detects the ball jam error, it transmits a ball jam signal to the main control board 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 (fire permission signal OFF). Until the full state of is eliminated, the control is performed to stop the launching operation.
Also, the payout control board 29 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28 on condition that the main control board 20 instructs launch permission.

Here, the main control board 20 is connected to a setting key switch 94 and a RAM clear switch 98, and can receive detection signals from these switches.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for inputting an instruction to initialize a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to a setting change mode (at the time of ON operation) by inserting a setting key possessed by the hall staff and performing an ON/OFF operation when power is turned on.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the set value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value representing the stage of the winning probability of whether or not to win a game state advantageous to the player.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON/OFF according to the operation of a RAM clear button which is operable when the inner frame 2 is open.
The setting key switch 94 is provided correspondingly with a key cylinder into which the above-described setting key can be inserted and removed. When it is turned in the opposite direction from the ON state, it is turned OFF.
The key cylinder is provided so that it can be operated by inserting a setting key while the inner frame 2 is open. Note that the key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting a setting key.

In this example, the above RAM clear button is also used for changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for forwarding the set value Ve.

A RAM clear switch 98 and a setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine 1 . For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20 .

A setting/performance indicator 97 is also connected to the main control board 20 .
The setting/performance display 97 is configured with, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as display means capable of displaying setting values Ve and performance information (to be described later). The setting/performance indicator 97 is mounted, for example, on the main control board 20 at an easily visible position.
The main control board 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying the set value Ve and performance information to the setting/performance indicator 97 .

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least the jackpot (hit type that will operate the condition device described later) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) The higher the set value Ve, the higher the probability of winning (setting 1 is the lowest probability of winning, and thereafter, the probability of winning increases in ascending order of the set values), which works in favor of the player. there is In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "mechanical discount (payout rate, payout rate)", which is advantageous to the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the probability of winning a jackpot, a machine discount, etc., and means a value for a grade related to the probability of occurrence of a specific event such as a profit state that acts on a player. , in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage in the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are six levels of set value Ve (levels of advantage) that are legally available. Specifically, it is assumed that the legally usable range of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as “usable range Re”) is in the range of “1” to “6”.
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only a part of the set values Ve among the set values Ve that can be used under the rules. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example uses only three values, for example, "1", "2", and "6", among the set values Ve within the usable range Re, which are "1" to "6". do. In other words, the specification is limited to three stages for the winning probability, instead of six stages, which is the maximum stage according to the rules.
Hereinafter, the range of setting values Ve actually used in the pachinko game machine 1, specifically, the range of setting values Ve actually used among the setting values Ve within the usable range Re (in the above example, "1 , 2, and 6) is referred to as the 'usage range Ru'.

The set value Ve is set exclusively by a hall staff such as a hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (amusement store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, it is possible to appropriately determine which jackpot winning probability is changed according to the set value Ve, or the type of target jackpot. For example, if there are three types of jackpots 1 to 3, the higher the set value Ve is, the higher the winning probability of all the jackpots 1 to 3 may be. The combined winning probability may be increased. Also, the winning probability of some jackpots may be increased. For example, only the winning probabilities of the jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the jackpot 3 may be set to be constant with all set values Ve.

(Regarding setting value change operation)
In order to change the setting value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned ON (operated to the setting change mode side) in a state in which the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and the inner frame 2 is released, and The game machine 1 is powered on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current setting value Ve is displayed on the setting/performance display 97, and the setting value Ve (1, 2, and 6 in this example) can be changed in a "setting change mode".

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is made in the main control side main process, which will be described later (see step S104 in FIG. 8). When the above operation conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, processing for setting change is executed accordingly.

After shifting to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button functioning as a change operator for the set value Ve is turned ON, the current display value of the setting/performance display 97 changes to "1→2→6→1→ 2→6→ . . . ” within the usage range Ru. When the desired setting value Ve is reached, the setting key switch 94 is turned off, and the setting value Ve is determined, and information on the determined setting value Ve is stored in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated and the display of the setting/performance display 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the game is shifted to a state in which the progress of the game is permitted.

(About performance display)
The main control board 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information to the setting/performance display device 97 .
The performance information is information that pachinko halls and related government agencies want to confirm, and typical examples thereof include information on the presence or absence of fraudulent prize balls such as excess prize balls for the gaming machine 1 and information on the original performance of the gaming machine 1. is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player is enjoying the game, unlike the advance notice effect or the like.

For this reason, the setting/performance display device 97 can be placed inside the game machine 1, for example, on the main control board 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, the effect control board 30, or the board case (which protects the board). A protective cover) is provided at a position where display information can be visually recognized when the inner frame 2 is opened.

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payout balls paid out due to winning during a specific state (total number of prize balls during a specific state: α) is The information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) divided by the number of pieces: β can be adopted as the performance information.
The above-mentioned "total number of payouts" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when entering the winning opening (starting opening 34, starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, big winning opening 50). . In the case of the present embodiment, there are three starting holes 34 or starting holes 35, thirteen big winning holes 50, and ten general winning holes 43. FIG.
Further, which state to adopt as the specific state can be appropriately determined according to the state under which performance information is desired to be grasped. In the case of this embodiment, any state can be employed among the normal state, latent probability state, time saving state, probability variable state, and jackpot game. Also, multiple types of states may be measured. For example, a normal state and a variable probability state, and all game states except during a winning game, etc., and the types to be measured can be determined as appropriate.
Also, as the period of the specific state, the period of either the low probability state or the high probability state of the jackpot lottery probability may be employed.
Also, the total number of payouts excluding one or a plurality of specific winning holes from the measurement target may be the total number of payouts (total number of payouts excluding specific winning holes). For example, the total number of payouts may be determined by excluding the large winning openings 50 from the measurement targets among the winning openings.

(2) In addition, only one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding a specific winning hole, or the total number of out-balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as the performance information.

In this embodiment, the total number of balls paid out during the normal state (normal number of balls paid out) and the total number of out balls during the normal state (normal number of out balls) are measured in real time. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by 100 (normal payout count/normal out count x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as “normal ratio information”). In addition, the display value at this time shall be the value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, each data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the normal ratio information are stored in the corresponding areas of the main control RAM 20c (specified total prize ball number storage area, specified out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area). are stored (memorized) in each. However, when the total number of out-balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is stopped once, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information. This prescribed number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during all game states (including during winning games) (hereinafter referred to as "the number of out balls in all states"). This all-state-out number is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (all-state-out number storage area) of the main control RAM 20c. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the specified total number of winning balls storage area, specified out number storage area, specified ratio information storage area, and all state out number storage area are abbreviated as "measurement information storage area".

Then, the normal time ratio information at the end point is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the main control RAM 20c (this normal time ratio information is stored), and then the measurement information storage area (normal payout number, normal time After clearing the number of out balls and the number of all out balls), measurement is started again (measurement of the number of normal payouts, the normal number of out balls, the normal ratio information, and the number of out balls in all states is started). The setting/performance display device 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. It should be noted that not only the information of the previous time but also the history of the time before last or the time before that (three times before) may be displayed.

Here, in the case of this example, the setting/performance indicator 97 alternatively displays the setting value Ve and the performance information. Specifically, in this example, settings are changed and checked only when the power is turned on. After the set value Ve is displayed on the performance indicator 97 and the setting change or setting confirmation is completed, the performance information is displayed.
It should be noted that the configuration in which the set value Ve and the performance information are displayed by a common display is not limited, and a configuration in which they are displayed by separate displays can also be adopted. In that case, the setting value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Production control command)
The main control board 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information on special symbol variation display games, information on errors, etc. to the effect control board 30 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent dishonesty such as gratuitous acts, the main control board 20 only transmits signals to the effect control board 30, and a one-way communication configuration in which signals from the effect control board 30 cannot be received. It's becoming

Here, the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit7 is ON, and Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When transmitting these information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the main control CPU 20a sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control board 30, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting, the first strobe signal is sent. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has passed since the transmission of this strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a predetermined time has passed since this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the main control CPU 20a for a predetermined period during which the effect control CPU 30a can reliably receive commands.

[2.2 Production control board]
The performance control board 30 is equipped with a microprocessor containing a performance control CPU 30a, and a performance control ROM 30b storing performance data required for performance control processing, and a performance control RAM 30c functioning as a work area and a buffer memory. It is composed mainly of a computer, and is also provided with a sound control section (sound source IC), RTC (Real Time Clock) function section, counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc., and controls the overall performance operation.

The production control CPU 30a performs arithmetic processing for various production operations and controls each production means based on the production control program and the production control command received from the main control unit 20. FIG. In the case of the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the rendering means includes the liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device 36M, sub liquid crystal display device 36S), optical display device 45a, sound generator 46a, and a movable Become a body role.

The effect control ROM 30b stores a control program for the effect operation by the effect control CPU 30a and various data necessary for control of the effect operation.
The effect control RAM 30c is used as a work area used by the effect control CPU 30a for various arithmetic processing, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data and processing data, and the like.
Although the effect control board 30 has, for example, a structure in which a one-chip microcomputer and its peripheral circuits are mounted, various structures of the effect control board 30 are conceivable. For example, in addition to the microcomputer, an interface circuit with each part, a random number generation circuit that generates random numbers for lottery for production, CTC for various time counts, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit, an interrupt signal to the production control CPU 30a may also include an interrupt controller circuit or the like that provides

The main roles of this production control board 30 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection and determination of production based on the production control commands, display control of the liquid crystal display device 36 (supply of display data), and sound generator 46a. , light emission control of the optical display device 45a (LED), operation control of the movable body role object (drive control of the movable body role object motor 80c), and the like.

Since the effect control board 30 also has a function as a control device for the liquid crystal display device 36, the effect control board 30 also functions as a so-called VDP (Video Display Processor), an image ROM, and a VRAM (Video RAM). The provided effect control CPU 30a also functions as a liquid crystal control section.
VDP refers to a function of controlling overall video output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing.
The image ROM refers to a memory in which image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image expansion processing is stored.
VRAM is an image memory area for temporarily storing image data developed by VDP.

The effect control board 30 generates various image data based on commands from the main control unit 20 and outputs the data to the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S.
Here, the "liquid crystal display device 36" shown in FIG. 2 is the "main liquid crystal display device 36M". The illustration of the sub-liquid crystal display device 36S is omitted in FIG.

In addition, the production control board 30 has a sound control unit (for example, the sound controller 230 in FIG. 4) for the sound generator 46a including a plurality of speakers 46, and the sound signal output by the sound control unit is amplified by the amplifier unit 46d. and supplied to the speaker 46 . Although the sound controller 230 as the sound control section is described as being built in the effect control board 30, the sound control part may use a sound source IC separate from the effect control board 30. FIG.
In addition, the production control board 30 includes a lamp driver section 45d that functions as an optical display control section for an optical display device 45a that includes a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, and a movable body accessory motor that operates a movable body (not shown). A motor driver section 80d (motor drive circuit) that functions as a drive control section for 80c is connected. The performance control board 30 instructs the lamp driver section 45d and the motor driver section 80d to control the light display operation by the light display device 45a and the operation of the movable body accessory motor 80c.

The effect control board 30 is also connected with an origin switch 81 and a position detection sensor 82 for monitoring the motion of the movable accessory.
The origin switch 81 is composed of, for example, a photointerrupter or the like, and detects whether or not the movable accessory motor 80c is at the origin position. The origin position is, for example, a position where the movable body does not normally appear on the board surface of FIG. The effect control board 30 can determine whether or not the movable body accessory motor 80c is at the origin position based on the detection information of the origin switch 81. FIG.
In addition, the effect control board 30 controls the action mode while monitoring the current action position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82 . Furthermore, the effect control board 30 monitors malfunctions in the motion of the movable body role based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82, and detects any malfunctions as errors.

In addition, the production control board 30 is connected to the production button 13, the cross key 15a, and the determination button 15b shown as the operation unit 17 in the figure, that is, the operation detection switch of the production button 13, the cross key 15a, and the determination button 15b. The production control board 30 can receive operation detection signals from the production button 13, the cross key 15a, and the decision button 15b.

Furthermore, the effect control board 30 is provided with a handle sensor 83 (touch sensor) for detecting whether or not the shooting operation handle 15 shown in FIG. 1 is touched by a user such as a player. The performance control board 30 can determine whether or not the shooting operation handle 15 is touched by the user based on the information detected by the handle sensor 83 .

Based on the performance control command sent from the main control unit 20, the performance control board 30 selects (determines) a performance pattern by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of performance patterns prepared in advance, and selects (determines) the required performance pattern. To display a desired performance by controlling various performance means at timing. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking driving of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern fluctuation display operation, A "drawing scenario" in a broad sense is realized by the time-series development of advance notice effects, etc.

Here, for the production control command, the production control board 30 (production control CPU 30a) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-described strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (main control CPU 20a), and receives and analyzes it. conduct. Specifically, the effect control CPU 30a executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing based on the input of the strobe signal described above, and acquires the effect control command in the interrupt processing realized thereby, do the analysis.
At this time, if an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the effect control CPU 30a, even during execution of interrupt processing based on other interrupts (timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed), The command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the processing concerned, and the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
[3.1 Symbol variation display game]
Next, the outline of the game operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration (FIG. 3) as described above will be described.
First, the symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a random number A “big hit lottery” will be held by lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the main control board 20 causes the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to variably display the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 to start the special symbol variation display game, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, displays the result as a special symbol. Derivation display is performed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big-hit lottery based on the winning to the starting port 34 and the big-hitting lottery based on the winning to the starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the big-hit lottery result for the starting port 34 is derived from the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big-hit lottery result for the starting port 35 is derived from the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that the game ball enters the starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the side of the special symbol display device 38b, on the condition that the game ball enters the starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variability display game is started. . Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the big win lottery result is a "big win", a predetermined "big win". In other cases, the special symbol during variable display is stopped and displayed in a predetermined "lost" mode, thereby deriving the game result (big hit lottery result).

In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the side of the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the side of the special symbol display device 38b. The variable display game is called "special symbol variable display game 2". In addition, unless particularly necessary, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and ""Special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative pattern variation display game)
Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, along with this, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying decorative symbols (dramatic game symbols) on the main liquid crystal display device 36M. Various productions are developed along with. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device displays a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the main liquid crystal display device 36M reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the decorative symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big win" (when the big win lottery result is "big win"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the display state of "7" in the 7 segment), the main liquid crystal display device 36M displays "left", "middle", " In each of the "right" display areas, the decorative pattern reflects the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" display areas, the three decorative patterns are "7", "7", " 7” display state).

When the "big hit" is achieved, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the "big win" symbol mode is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern. A special game state (jackpot game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the open door 52b is operated until the opening time of the jackpot opens for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) or until the number of game balls that win the jackpot (big prize jack) 50) (maximum number of winning balls: maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or enlarged by one actuation of the accessory: e.g. 9) until the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions are met, the big winning opening is closed. round) repeated.

When the big win game is started, an opening performance for notifying the start of the big win is first performed, and after the opening performance is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. After the end of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to notify that the big win is over, thereby ending the big win game.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control board 20 is based on the fact that the game ball enters (wins) the starting port 34 or the starting port 35. On the condition that the game ball is detected by the mouth sensor 34a or the starting mouth sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition regarding special symbols) is established, a lottery is performed to determine whether it is a "big hit" or "lost". (Lottery by type of winner)' and 'Pattern lottery (lottery of winning type (winning type) lottery)' that draws the type of jackpot if it is a "big hit" and the type of loss if it is a "losing". Perform a jackpot lottery (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery may be omitted because there is no need to perform a type lottery for the loss), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the winning type Accordingly, a special symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "special stop symbol") is determined.

Then, the main control board 20, as an effect control command specifying the processing state, at least the special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information about the big hit lottery result and the special symbol variation time, etc.) "variation pattern specification command" including. It is transmitted to the performance control board 30 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control board 30 . In the present embodiment, in order to increase the variation of effects, a "decorative design designation command" including special stop design information (symbol lottery result information (information on winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control board 30. It's like

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern information can include information designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "ready-to-win effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect", which will be described later) will occur. More specifically, the variation patterns of the special symbols are roughly classified into a "hit variation pattern" for winning and a "losing variation pattern" for losing, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. For these variation patterns, for example, 'reach variation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach production described later, 'normal variation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of reach production, pseudo-continuous production and reach production (overlapping occurrence) A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as 'pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern' to be specified, 'pseudo-continuous normal fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-continuous production and does not specify the occurrence of reach production. In order to secure the performance time of the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation pattern that designates the ready-to-win effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control board 30 is based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command) sent from the main control board 20, during the decorative design variation display game chronologically. Decide the production content to be developed (production scenario such as advance notice production) and the decorative pattern to be finally displayed stopped (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern by fluctuating according to the time schedule based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern. A pattern variation display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the main liquid crystal display device 36M in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game. The middle period has substantially the same time width. In addition, the effect control board 30 controls the main liquid crystal display device 36M, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect), sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and LED (light effect) are realized on the main liquid crystal display device 36M.

As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display results of the special symbol variation display game are reflected in the decoration symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In this specification, the above-described two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games" unless otherwise specified.

(Normal pattern fluctuation display game)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning a prize), the main control board 20 performs an "auxiliary winning lottery" based on a random number lottery. Based on the result of the lottery, the normal symbols represented by the LEDs are variably displayed on the composite display device 38d to start the normal symbol variation display game, and after a certain period of time has elapsed, the results are displayed in combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LEDs. It is designed to stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "assist hit", the display unit of the normal symbol of the composite display device 38d is in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or "○" and "X", the LED on the "O" side is lit).

When this "assist hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable wing 47 in an inverted "V" shape to open the starting port 35 or It becomes a state (starting opening open state) in which the game ball is enlarged and easily flows in, and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric open game, by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41, until the opening time of the starting port 35 elapses a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the number of game balls winning the starting port 35 The winning area is opened or expanded until the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), and when any of these conditions is met, the starting port 35 is closed. It is designed to be repeated.

(About hold)
Here, in this embodiment, during the special/decorative pattern variation display game, during the normal pattern variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the general electric open game, etc., the starting port 34, the starting port 35, or the normal symbol starting port 37 is won. occurs, that is, there is a detection signal input from the start sensor 34a, the start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is established, this is displayed in a variable manner. As the data relating to the right to start the game, except for the data relating to the variable display, the data is reserved and stored up to the maximum number of reserved memories (for example, a maximum of 4), which is a predetermined upper limit. The reserved data that is not used for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as "operational reserved ball". In order to make clear to the player the number of activated balls to be held, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place in the gaming machine 1 or the liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device 36M or sub liquid crystal display device) is displayed. 36S) light up a hold indicator provided as an icon image in the screen.

In addition, in this embodiment, up to four operation reserve balls relating to special design 1, special design 2, and normal design are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the main control RAM 20c, and reserved as the number of determinations of special design or normal design variation. do. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reservation memory number) of each operation reservation ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Also, all or part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics.

[3.2 Game state]
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of game states in addition to the big win which is the special game state. In order to facilitate understanding of this embodiment, first, various game states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of game states: a normal state, a time-saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variable state. These game states are distinguished by whether or not a jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state) and an electric chew support state (privilege game) occur (with electric support, without electric support).

"Electric chew support state" means that the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 in the general electric open game (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing 47 and the number of times it is opened) is in the normal state It refers to the "open extended state" extended more than. When the open extension state occurs, the opening operation period of the movable wing 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds in the normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is increased, for example. It is extended from the normal 1 time to 2 to 3 times.

In the case of the present embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the auxiliary winning lottery probability fluctuates from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (normal A pattern probability fluctuation state) occurs, and a 'normal pattern time saving state' that shortens the average time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation display operation time) occurs (for example, from 10 seconds 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the common electric open game occurs frequently, and the operating rate improved state (high base state) in which the operating rate of the movable wing pieces 47 per unit time is improved than in the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the electric chewing support state is abbreviated as "with electric support", and the other case is abbreviated as "without electric support".

In the present embodiment, the “normal state” means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and the game state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

"Time-saving state" means that the probability of the jackpot lottery is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (variation display operation time of special symbols)) is lower than the normal state. It is a game state in which a 'special symbol time saving state' that is also shortened occurs and an electric chew support state occurs. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + electric sapo + special symbol time saving state".

The “potential state” is a “special symbol probability variable state” in which the jackpot lottery probability has changed to a high probability (for example, 1/39.9) that is higher than the above low probability, and a game state without an electric sapo (high Probability + no electricity support).

"Probability variable state" is a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the latent probability state, but the special symbol time saving state and the electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the variable state, it becomes "high probability + electric sapo + special pattern time saving state".

Regarding the game state, focusing on the jackpot lottery probability, if the game state is the “normal state” or “time saving state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability is “low probability state”, and the game state is “latent state” or “variable probability”. state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. During the big win, a big win game in which the big prize opening is opened and closed occurs, but the big win lottery probability and the presence or absence of an electric support are placed under the same low probability and no electric support game state as in the above normal state.

[3.3 Per hit]
Next, the “hit” in the game machine 1 will be explained.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big win lottery (hit lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of wins. In the case of this example, the types of hits include, for example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "variable probability 6R", and "variable probability 10R".
Note that the notation of "R" means the prescribed number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or a game ball is displayed. It means something that operates when passing through a specific area in the big winning opening.

The variable probability state ends the high probability state and shifts to the low probability state when the special symbol variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the prescribed ST number) without winning the jackpot type. , It is a so-called "number-of-times-cutting variable machine (ST machine)", and when the prescribed number of STs is completed, the game is shifted to the normal state from the next game. However, it may be a "general probability changer" that continues until the next big hit is won.

The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (the total number of variations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2), It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Also, the number of times of the time-saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be determined as appropriate according to the playability. Also, there is no particular limitation on the type of hit to be provided, and it can be determined as appropriate.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for "losing" as well as the jackpot types. Specifically, there are three kinds of loss types: "loss 1", "loss 2", and "loss 3".
As described above, when the result of the win-lose lottery is "lost", the lottery for the type of loosing is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3.4 About production]
(Direction mode)
Next, the production mode (production state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of performance modes for producing performances related to game states, and is configured to be able to move between the performance modes. Specifically, there are provided a normal production mode, a time saving production mode, a latent probability production mode, and a probability variable production mode corresponding to each of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent probability state, and the probability variable state. In each production mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of decorative patterns is displayed with different background production, so that the player can grasp what kind of game state he is currently staying in. It has become.

The production control board 30 (production control CPU 30a) has a functional section (production state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of production modes. The production control board 30 (production control CPU 30a) includes specific production control commands sent from the main control board 20 (main control CPU 20a), specifically, game state information managed on the main control board 20 side. Based on the performance control command, the current game state is grasped in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control board 20 side, and the shift control between plural kinds of performance modes is possible. As the specific effect control command as described above, for example, there are a variation pattern designation command, a decorative design designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Notice production)
Next, the advance notice effect will be described. The production control board 30 is based on the content of the production control command from the main control board 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, variously related to the current production mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured to be able to control the appearance of such a "notice effect". Such a notice effect is used as a "promotion effect" to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation of whether or not the winning type has been won (hereinafter referred to as "expectation to win"), and to arouse the player's expectation of winning. work. Typical advance notice effects include "ready effect", "pseudo-continuous effect", and "pre-reading effect". The effect control board 30 functions as a notice effect control means capable of controlling execution (appearance) of these effects.

"Reach production" refers to a production mode with a reach state (variation display mode with a reach state: reach fluctuation pattern), specifically, to derive and display the final game result via the reach state Say the production mode. The ready-to-win effects include multiple types of ready-to-win effects associated with winning expectations. For example, in some cases, the degree of winning expectation is relatively higher than when the normal reach effect appears. Such reach performance is called 'super reach performance'. Many of these "super reach" have relatively longer presentation time (fluctuation time) than normal reach in order to arouse expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects such as super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of these super reach 1 to 4 is "super reach 1 < super reach 2 < super Reach 3 < Super Reach 4” relationship.

"Pseudo-continuous effect" refers to a mode of production accompanied by a pseudo-continuous change display state (pseudo-continuous change) of decorative patterns. It refers to a variable display mode in which a part or all of the symbols are once temporarily stopped, and the display operation is repeated once or more than once, such as executing the re-variable display operation of the decorative symbols from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the later-described "pre-reading forewarning effect (continuous forewarning effect)" that is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Such a "pseudo-run" basically has a rate of occurrence (appearance rate) that increases the expectation of winning as the number of pseudo-fluctuations increases. It is made easy to select an effect for arousing expectations such as reach.

"Pre-reading notice effect" (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "pre-reading notice" or "pre-reading effect") is based on the result of pre-reading judgment, before the fluctuation display of the pattern to be judged is performed, It means an effect that notifies the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. The term "advantageous state" means a state that is advantageous to the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead effect of this example is mainly for pending display of the operation pending balls (undigested operation pending balls) that have not yet been subjected to the execution of the symbol variation display game (the special symbol variation display operation). Before the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game, it is performed in a performance mode that can notify the winning expectation in advance by using the aspect and the background effect of the symbol variation display game to be executed first. . In addition, in the pattern variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "SU (step-up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "resurrection effect", and "premier notice effect" are available. It occurs, and it is designed to excite the game content.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the "holding change notice effect" as an example of the look-ahead notice effect will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display effect or advance notice effect is displayed) is provided in the upper display area within the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 36M. display area) is provided, and in the lower display area in the screen, a reservation display area 76 (reservation display part a1 to d1) that displays the number of operation reservation balls on the special symbol 1 side and a special A reservation display area 77 (reservation display portions a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation reservation balls on the symbol 2 side is provided. As for the presence or absence of the operation pending ball, that effect is reported by a predetermined pending display mode. In FIG. 5, the presence or absence of the operation retention ball is lit (with operation retention ball: “○ (white circle)” in the illustration), or in the off state (no operation retention ball: dashed circle in the illustration). It shows an example in which information about the number of balls in operation is notified.

The display (suspension display) regarding the presence or absence of the operation reserve ball is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (the order of winning). It is displayed as the first (that is, the oldest) active holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, there is provided a changing display area 78 for showing the active holding ball currently being used in the special symbol changing display game. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game pending K which is currently being played is placed on the icon of the strike seat J appears. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest pending a1 or a2 icon (icon image) displayed in the pending display areas 76 and 77 is the pending K during game execution. As an icon, it moves onto the icon of the striker J in the changing display area 78, and this state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation pending ball occurs, from the main control board 20, the pre-reading judgment information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operating pending balls at the time of the pre-reading judgment (the number of existing operating pending balls including the currently generated operating pending ball) A "suspended addition command" specifying and is transmitted to the effect control board 30 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 28).
In the case of this embodiment, the pending addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the pending addition command can specify the upper byte side data that can specify the number of operation pending balls at the time of prefetching determination, and the prefetching determination information. It consists of lower byte side data.

Here, as can be understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, based on the occurrence of a winning prize at the starting port 34 or the starting port 35 and a new retained ball, as a prefetch determination for the retained ball , a jackpot lottery for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball is carried out. As will be described later, the main control board 20 reserves and stores information representing the result of the big hit lottery performed as such prefetch determination in the corresponding storage area of the main control RAM 20c.
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of the prefetch determination is used to select (lottery) the pattern variation pattern in the pattern variation display game, and can be rephrased as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control board 20 carries out a pre-reading determination, and reserves and stores the "variation pattern selection information" obtained as a result in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.

When the effect control board 30 receives the pending addition command transmitted by the main control board 20, based on the prefetch determination information included therein, as part of the display control processing related to the pending display, "prefetching preview effect" is performed. Effect control processing related to is performed. Concretely, a "pre-reading notice lottery" is carried out to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is, specifically, the result of the big win lottery (big win lottery result at the start of variation) executed when the operation reserve ball is offered to the symbol variation display game in the main control board 20, This is the game information obtained by pre-reading and judging the fluctuation pattern at the time of fluctuation start. That is, this information includes at least the information (prefetching winning/losing information) that prefetches the winning/losing lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and the information that prefetches the pattern lottery result (prefetching pattern information) and the fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation. Information (prefetch variation pattern information) obtained by prefetch determination of the pattern can be included. What kind of information is included in the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control board 30 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified by the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the pending addition command includes prefetch hit/loss information, prefetch pattern information, and prefetch variation pattern information.

It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead judgment when the operation reserve ball is generated is not necessarily the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation reserve ball is actually used for the fluctuation display operation. no. For example, representatively explaining the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "super reach 1", in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is called "super reach 1" It is possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, but the "super reach type" that is the gist of it.

In the case of this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon targeted for the pre-reading notice is, for example, a normal holding display. (Normal pending display mode) can change from white (normal pending display mode) to pending display (special pending display mode) with blue, green, red, and danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) for advance notice display (special pending display mode) System" pre-reading notice effect (also referred to as "holding change notice") is performed.
FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation holding ball of the hatched holding display portion b1 has changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of blue, green, red, and danger pattern of the pending icon means that the expectation of winning is high in this order, and especially the display of the pending icon with the danger pattern has an extremely high expectation of winning the jackpot. It is supposed to be a premium pending icon that will be displayed.

(Direction means)
Various effects in the game machine 1 are produced by effect means provided in the game machine 1 . The directing means may be stimulus transmission means capable of exhibiting directing effects by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. light effect means), sound generator such as speaker 46 (sound generator 46a: sound effect means), effect display device (display means) such as main liquid crystal display device 36M and sub liquid crystal display device 36S, contact with operator's body Typical examples include a pressure device that transmits pressure, a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual performance effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the sense of sight like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes devices that do not rely on images (for example, a 7-segment display device). When it is called an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that produces effects by image display, and devices that produce effects by means other than images, such as 7-segment displays, are included in the concept of the above-mentioned effect display device.

<4. Opening/Closing Structure and Substrate Arrangement>

The configuration of FIG. 3 described above is actually realized via a plurality of substrates. Some of the boards mounted on the game machine 1 will be extracted and their arrangement will be described below. Also, the opening/closing structure of the gaming machine 1 will be explained for the mounting position of the board.

FIG. 5 shows a state in which the door 6 is opened.
By opening the door 6, the inner frame 2 and the game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2 are directly exposed.
The substrate arranged on the door 6 and the substrate arranged on the inner frame 2 are wired and connected by a harness as a transmission line H8.

The gaming machine 1 is also configured so that the inner frame 2 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 4 .
FIG. 6 shows a state in which the inner frame 2 is opened. By opening the inner frame 2, the game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2 is also released from the outer frame 4.例文帳に追加FIG. 6 shows a state in which the back cover 18 attached to the back side of the game board 3 is visible. Although the game board 3 is not shown in FIG. 6, the back side of the game board 3 is exposed when the back cover 18 is removed (opened). Actually, the back side of the game board 3 can be visually recognized in the state of FIG. 6 because the back cover 18 is transparent or translucent.
In addition, the game board 3 can be further removed from the inner frame 2 .

Thus, the gaming machine 1 can be roughly divided into an outer frame 4, an inner frame 2 attached to the outer frame 4, a game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2, and a It consists of a door 6 located. Various substrates are attached to any of the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6.

FIG. 7 shows the positions of some of the boards attached to the game board 3. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 7 shows the board mounted on the back side of the game area 3a when the game board 3 is viewed from the back side. Therefore, the right side of the drawing is the left side when the game board 3 is viewed from the front side. In the figure, the outline of the frame of the game board 3 is indicated by a dashed line for the reference of the position.

As shown in the figure, on the back side of the game board 3, the effect control board 30 is arranged slightly above the center, and the main control board 20 is arranged below it. A liquid crystal control board 901 is arranged so as to overlap with the performance control board 30, and a ROM board 902 and a liquid crystal interface board 903 are arranged in the vicinity thereof.

An LED connection board 700 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the game board 3, and a power supply module board 904 is arranged near the top thereof.
An upper connection board 905 is arranged above the game board 3 .

In the vicinity of the main control board 20, a relay board 760, a decoration board 740, a board back left relay board 720, a game board connection board 906, a board back bottom relay board 800, and a frame LED relay board 840 are arranged.

Further, there are LED boards 780 and 790 and a decorative board 820 as boards mounted on movable accessories (not shown) mounted on the game board.

FIG. 8 shows the positions of some of the substrates attached to the door 6 as seen from the front side of the game machine 1. FIG. As a configuration inside the gaming machine 1, the door 6, the effect button 13, the firing operation handle 15, and the upper speaker 46 are indicated by a dashed line for the purpose of positioning.

A relay board 550 is provided above the door 6 .
Similarly, a side unit upper LED board 630 is provided above the door 6, a side unit upper right LED board 600 is provided on the upper right of the door 6, and a side unit lower right LED board 620 is provided below. The side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit lower right LED board 620, and the side unit upper LED board 630 are mounted inside the side unit 10 (see FIG. 1). By being mounted, the position state shown in FIG. 8 is obtained.

A frame left LED board 907 is arranged on the upper left side of the door 6, and a frame lower left LED board 908 is arranged below it.
A front frame LED connection board 500 is arranged below the door 6 .
A button LED connection board 640 is arranged at the lower right, and a button LED board 660 is arranged inside the production button 13 .

Next, the positions of the substrates attached to the inner frame 2 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram of the gaming machine 1 as seen from the back. The rear side of the gaming machine 1 is mostly protected by a transparent or translucent rear cover 18.例文帳に追加
A power supply board 300 and a payout control board 29 are arranged in the front-rear direction under the back side.
In addition, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is attached to the lower right side as viewed from the back side.

FIG. 10 shows the arrangement positions of various devices arranged on the door 6 and the game board 3 . The contours of the game board 3 and the door 6 are indicated by dashed lines to indicate the position of each device.

10, devices provided in the side unit 10 of the door 6 include a side unit device 101, a side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102, a side unit lower right movable object motor 103, and a side unit upper right movable object motor 104. , the upper right movable solenoid 105 of the side unit, the blower 106, and the photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are arranged at the illustrated positions. Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are attached to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.

In FIG. 10, the devices attached to the game board 3 include a lower back movable object upper position detection switch 120, a lower back movable object right position detection switch 121, a distribution position detection switch 122, a lower front movable object position detection switch 123, a lower Front movable object motor 124, bottom back movable object left position detection switch 125, bottom back movable object left motor 126, bottom back movable object bottom right position detection switch 127, bottom back movable object bottom left position detection switch 128, top movable object left Motor 129, upper movable object left position detection switch 130, left movable object motor 131, upper movable object position detection switch 132, upper movable object right motor 133, left movable object position detection switch 134, lower back movable object right motor 135, They are arranged at the positions shown in the figure.

It should be noted that the boards shown in FIGS. 7, 8, and 9 are only part of the boards provided in the gaming machine 1. FIG. In particular, it illustrates the main substrates to be covered in the following description.
Also, the devices shown in FIG. 10 are only part of the devices provided in the gaming machine 1 .

<5. Board Connection Configuration>
[5.1 Connection state of each board]

The connection configuration of each substrate arranged as described above will be described, and the supply path of the power supply voltage will be referred to.

FIG. 11 shows an example of substrates arranged on the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6, respectively.
In this case, the boards mounted on the game board 3 include the main control board 20, the effect control board 30, the frame LED relay board 840, the LED connection board 700, the board back left relay board 720, the decoration board 740, the relay board 760, and the LED A substrate 780, an LED substrate 790, a backside lower relay substrate 800, and a decoration substrate 820 are shown.
As the boards mounted on the inner frame 2, the power supply board 300, the payout control board 29, and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are shown.
Boards mounted on the door 6 include a front frame LED connection board 500, a relay board 550, a side unit upper right LED board 600, a side unit lower right LED board 620, a side unit upper LED board 630, a button LED connection board 640, and buttons. An LED substrate 660 is shown.

Each of these boards is a part of the boards mounted on the game machine 1, and the boards mounted on the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6 include various boards other than those shown in the drawings. This FIG. 11 shows a connection system of substrates extracted for use in explaining the technology as an embodiment of the present invention, and does not show all substrates.

The power supply substrate 300 is a substrate that supplies a DC voltage as an operating power supply to each part based on an AC input power supply.
The main control board 20, the performance control board 30, and the payout control board 29 are as explained in FIG.

The front frame LED connection board 500 is a board for supplying operation control signals and power supply voltages to performance means such as LEDs provided on the door 6, motors of movable bodies, solenoids, and blowers.

A side unit upper right LED board 600, a side unit lower right LED board 620, and a side unit upper LED board 630 are boards arranged in the side unit 10, and constitute a drive control system for the mode of LEDs and movable body parts. These boards also constitute a detection system that transmits detection signals from motor position sensors, touch sensors, and other various sensors to the effect control board 30 .
As described above, the side unit 10 is attached to the door 6 as one of the decorative units, and the side unit 10 can be attached to and detached from the door 6 for replacement. The side unit upper right LED board 600 , the side unit lower right LED board 620 , and the side unit upper LED board 630 are attached and detached together with the side unit 10 .
When the side unit 10 is mounted and the relay board 550 and the transmission line H10 of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are connected, the electrical configuration shown in FIG. 11 is obtained.

The button LED board 660 constitutes the LED in the production button 13 and its light emission driving system, and also constitutes a circuit for transferring detection signals of various detection sensors.
The button LED connection board 640 relays control signals and power supply voltage to the button LED board 660, and transfers detection signals of various sensors.

The inner frame LED relay board 400 performs necessary signal processing while relaying between the frame LED relay board 840 connected to the effect control board 30 and the front frame LED connection board 500, and also generates and supplies power supply voltage. .
The frame LED relay board 840 relays the signal path between the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the effect control board 30 .

The LED boards 780 and 790 are mounted with LEDs in the game board 3 and drive the light emission. The relay board 760 relays the light emission driving signal of the LED. These LED boards 780, 790 and relay board 760 are attached to the movable accessory.
Decoration board 740 provides relay and drive for other LED boards.
The board rear left relay board 720 performs relay.
The decorative substrate 820 carries LEDs.
The board rear bottom relay board 800 performs relay.
LED connection board 700, based on the control signal from the effect control board 30, performs various necessary signal processing for the light emission drive of the effect means such as LEDs and motors.

These substrates are electrically connected by a transmission line H using harnesses and cables. "Transmission line H" is a generic term for the illustrated transmission lines H1, H2, . . . H31.
In each transmission line H, individual wiring paths for transmitting signals, power supply voltages, etc. are also simply referred to as "lines."
A transmission line H refers to a set of one or more lines.
The transmission line H includes various forms such as a flexible harness, a flexible substrate, and a wire harness. The transmission line H may be formed by integrating a plurality of lines, or may be formed by binding individual lines with a binder, tape, or the like.
Further, when the connectors are directly connected to each other, the terminals of the respective connectors become the transmission line H. In other words, the "transmission line H" includes a case where a wire material such as a harness does not exist.
That is, the transmission line H does not refer to a specific type or shape, but broadly refers to those forming electrical wiring between substrates or the like.

The power board 300 and the payout control board 29 are connected by a transmission line H1.
Also, the power supply board 300 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are connected by a transmission line H3.
These transmission lines H1 and H3 are formed by harnesses or the like arranged within the inner frame 2. As shown in FIG.

The power board 300 and the performance control board 30 are connected by a transmission line H2.
The payout control board 29 and the main control board 20 are connected by a transmission line H4.
The inner frame LED relay board 400 and the frame LED relay board 840 are connected by a transmission line H7.
These transmission lines H2, H4, and H7 are made up of harnesses or the like connecting between the inner frame 2 and the game board 3. As shown in FIG.

The main control board 20 and the performance control board 30 are connected by a transmission line H5.
The effect control board 30 and the frame LED relay board 840 are connected by a transmission line H6.
The effect control board 30 and the LED connection board 700 are connected by a transmission line H20.
The LED connection board 700 and the backside left relay board 720 are connected by a transmission line H21.
The backside left relay board 720 and the decoration board 740 are connected by a transmission line H22.
The decoration board 740 and the relay board 760 are connected by a transmission line H23. It is conceivable that the transmission line H23 is a flexible cable for connection with the relay board 760 attached to the movable object.
The relay board 760 and the LED board 780 are connected by a transmission line H24.
The LED substrate 780 and the LED substrate 790 are connected by a transmission line H25.
The LED connection board 700 and the underboard relay board 800 are connected by a transmission line H30.
The underside relay board 800 and the decoration board 820 are connected by a transmission line H31.
These transmission lines H 5 , H 6 , H 20 , H 21 , H 22 , H 23 , H 24 , H 25 , H 30 and H 31 are harnesses arranged within the game board 3 .

The inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500 are connected by a transmission line H8.
The transmission line H8 is formed by a harness or the like that connects across the inner frame 2 and the door 6. As shown in FIG.

The front frame LED connection board 500 and the relay board 550 are connected by a transmission line H9.
The relay board 550 and the side unit upper right LED board 600 are connected by a transmission line H10.
The side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 are connected by a transmission line H11.
The side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit upper LED board 630 are connected by a transmission line H12.
The front frame LED connection board 500 and the button LED connection board 640 are connected by a transmission line H15.
The button LED connection board 640 and the button LED board 660 are connected by a transmission line H16.
These transmission lines H 9 , H 10 , H 11 , H 12 , H 15 and H 16 are harnesses or the like arranged inside the door 6 .

The power supply substrate 300 supplies a power supply voltage to each part through transmission lines H1, H2, and H3.
FIG. 12 shows the power supply input/output of the power supply substrate 300. As shown in FIG.
The power board 300 is mounted with connectors CN1A to CN7A.
Transmission line ends of transmission lines H40, H41, and H42 (not shown in FIG. 11) are connected to the connectors CN5A, CN6A, and CN7A.

In the following description, the connectors CN1A to CN7A and the connectors shown in other drawings are collectively referred to as "connector CN".
In this specification, "connector CN" refers to a connector terminal component provided on the board. A terminal portion formed at the end of the transmission line H for connector connection is called a "transmission line end".
The "connector CN" is connected to the "transmission line end". Alternatively, the "connector CN" may be directly connected to another connector CN having a corresponding shape.

AC 24V power from the power plug 301 of the gaming machine 1 is supplied to the three-terminal connector CN5A through the transmission line H40 (AC-IN (A), AC-IN (B)).
Also, an FG (frame ground) path (FG) is formed through the ground terminal 302, the transmission line H40, and the connector CN5A. The ground terminal 302 is connected to the outside of the game machine main body, for example.

A transmission line H41 is connected to the two-terminal connector CN6A to form an FG path (FG-1) via ground terminals 303 and 304. FIG. The ground terminals 303 and 304 are connected to, for example, the main body of the gaming machine.
A transmission line H42 is connected to the two-terminal connector CN7A to form an FG path (FG-2) through ground terminals 305 and 306. FIG. The ground terminals 305 and 306 are connected to, for example, the main body of the gaming machine.

A transmission line H1-1 is connected to the 14-terminal connector CN1A. A transmission line H1-1 is connected to the connector CN4A having three terminals. The transmission lines H1-1 and H1-2 as these two harnesses are shown as the transmission line H1 in FIG. 11 described above.
35V DC voltage (DC35VA), 12V DC voltage (DC12VA), and 5V DC voltage (DC5VA) are supplied to payout control board 29 by transmission line H1-1, and a ground path (GND) is formed.
Two systems of 24V DC voltage (DC24VA, DC24VB) are supplied to the payout control board 29 through the transmission line H1-2, and an FG path (FG) is formed.

35V DC voltage (DC35VA), 12V DC voltage (DC12VA), and 5V DC voltage (DC5VA) are supplied to the main control board 20 via the payout control board 29, and a ground path (GND) is formed. .

A transmission line H2 is connected to the 20-terminal connector CN2A.
5V DC voltage (DC5VB), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and 35V DC voltage (DC35VB) are supplied to the effect control board 30 by the transmission line H2, and a ground path (GND) is formed.

Based on the power supply by the transmission line H2, the effect control board 30 to the LED connection board 700, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 35V DC voltage (DC35VB) is supplied, the LED connection board 700 and each downstream circuit board (the backside left relay board 720, the backside lower relay board 800, etc.).
On the other hand, the frame LED relay board 840 is a board having a simple relay wiring and does not require a power supply voltage, and the power supply voltage is not supplied from the effect control board 30 .

For the sake of explanation, the terms "upstream" and "downstream" are used, but with regard to data and control signals, the main control board 20 is the most upstream, followed by the effect control board 30, and from the effect control board 30 to the actual components such as LEDs and motors. "Downstream" toward the production device of
Regarding the power supply voltage, the power supply board 300 is the most upstream, and it is assumed to be "downstream" toward the actual production device.

A transmission line H3 is connected to the six-terminal connector CN3A.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the inner frame LED relay board 400 through the transmission line H3, and a ground path (GND) is formed.
In other words, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is a board controlled from the effect control board 30, but is configured to receive the power supply voltage directly from the power board 300.
Each board (front frame LED connection board 500 and the like) provided on the door 6 downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400 receives supply of power supply voltage from the inner frame LED relay board 400 .

[5.2 Inner frame LED relay board 400]

The circuit configuration of some of the substrates shown in FIG. 11 will be described below. First, the inner frame LED relay board 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG.
13 and 14 separately show the circuit configuration provided on the inner frame LED relay board 400. FIG.

Connectors CN1B, CN2B, and CN3B shown in FIG. 13 and connector CN4B shown in FIG. 14 are mounted on the inner frame LED relay board 400 .

The transmission line end of the transmission line H7 connecting between the frame LED relay board 840 and the connector CN1B is connected.
Although the details of the frame LED relay board 840 are omitted, it is a board having a simple relay wiring as described above. Therefore, the connector CN1B substantially forms wiring between the effect control board 30 via the transmission line H7, the frame LED relay board 840, and the transmission line H6.

This connector CN1B has 28 terminals from the first pin to the 28th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "28".
For convenience of explanation, the term "pin" of the connector CN does not refer only to pin-shaped male terminals, but includes both male terminals and female terminals. It is used to include terminals and the like.

The first, third, fifth, seventh, eighth, seventeenth and eighteenth pins are ground terminals. The second pin is assigned to the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the fourth pin to the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin to the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.

9th pin is clear signal CLR_L, 10th pin is clear signal CLR_M, 11th pin is clock signal CLK_L, 12th pin is clock signal CLK_M, 13th pin is data signal DATA_L, 14th pin is data signal DATA_M, 15th pin is A pin is assigned as an enable signal ENABLE_L, and a 16th pin is assigned as an enable signal ENABLE_M terminal.
The 19th to 28th pins are assigned to +terminals and -terminals of the upper right speaker, the middle right speaker, the lower right speaker, the upper left speaker, the middle left speaker, and the lower speaker as the speaker 46, respectively.

Here, the serial data signal S_IN_DATA is serial data received from the front frame LED connection board 500 and transmitted from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the effect control board 30 .
The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied from the effect control board 30 to the inner frame LED relay board 400 and further sent to the front frame LED connection board 500 . These are used for serial data transmission operation from the front frame LED connection board 500 on the downstream side.

Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M are signals supplied from the effect control board 30 and used for drive control of the effect devices.
For example, the data signals DATA_L and DATA_M are light emission drive signals and motor drive signals that indicate the gradation of the LED, and the clear signals CLR_L and CLR_M, etc., the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, etc., and the enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, etc. This is a signal for controlling the operation of the motor driver.
Note that the suffix "_L" of the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, etc. indicates that they are signals mainly used for LED operation control, and "_M" indicates that they are signals mainly used for motor operation control.

The connector CN2B is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H8 connecting to the front frame LED connection board 500 .
This connector CN2B has 30 terminals from the 1st pin to the 30th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "30".

The 1st pin and the 3rd pin are terminals for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
Four pins from the 27th pin to the 30th pin are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The fifth, seventh, eighth, seventeenth and eighteenth pins are ground terminals.
Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN2B are grounded. This is due to the mounting strength of the connector. The conductor points P1 and P2 are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.
In all other illustrated connectors CN, the conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.

The second pin is assigned to the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the fourth pin to the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin to the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.
9th pin is clear signal CLR_L, 10th pin is clear signal CLR_M, 11th pin is clock signal CLK_L, 12th pin is clock signal CLK_M, 13th pin is data signal DATA_L, 14th pin is data signal DATA_M, 15th pin is The pin is assigned as a general-purpose output port, and the 16th pin is assigned as each terminal of an enable signal ENABLE_M.
The 19th pin to the 26th pin are assigned to the + terminal and - terminal of the upper right speaker, the middle right speaker, the lower right speaker, the upper left speaker, and the middle left speaker as the speaker 46, respectively, as shown in the figure.

A connector CN3B is a connector for connection with a lower speaker, which is one of the speakers 46 (not shown in FIG. 11). In this connector CN3B, the first and second pins numbered "1" and "2" are assigned to the + and - terminals of the lower speaker, and are connected to the 27th and 28th pins of the connector CN1B. .

The connector CN4B in FIG. 14 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H3 connecting to the power supply board 300, and is connected to the connector CN3A of the power supply board 300 shown in FIG.
This connector CN4B has six terminals from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "6", which are assigned in the same manner as the connector CN3A of the power supply board 300. FIG. That is, the first pin, the second pin, and the third pin are terminals to which a 12 V DC voltage (12 VA DC) is supplied from the power supply board 300 . The fourth, fifth and sixth pins are ground terminals.

In this case, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is configured to input the 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) from the first pin, the second pin, and the third pin to the voltage regulator 401 via the fuse F1B. A 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is obtained as an output. Capacitors C3B, C4B, C5B, and C6B are connected in parallel between the input terminal side of the voltage regulator 401 and the ground. A capacitor C7B and a resistor R24B are connected in parallel between the output terminal side of the voltage regulator 401 and the ground.
That is, a 5V generator 410 is formed to generate a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA).

From the first and third pins of the connector CN2B in FIG. 13, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400 is supplied to the downstream board.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied to the downstream board via the 27th to 30th pins of the connector CN2B is supplied via the 1st, 2nd and 3rd pins of the connector CN4B in FIG. This is the voltage supplied from the power supply board 300 .

As shown in FIG. 13, buffer circuits 402 and 403 formed of ICs are arranged on the inner frame LED relay board 400 .
As the buffer circuits 402 and 403, an IC is used that functions as an inverter when the CONT terminal of the first pin is at L level and as a buffer when at H level. It works as a buffer.
As an operating power supply, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is applied to the VCC terminal of the 20th pin.

The buffer circuits 402 and 403 are Schmitt trigger buffers containing CMOS8 circuits, buffering the signals input from the second pin (A1 terminal) to the ninth pin (A8 terminal), that is, signal compensation (deteriorated H/ L signal waveform recovery), and output from the 18th pin (Y1 terminal) to the 11th pin (Y8 terminal), respectively.
That is, the signal input to the A1 terminal is buffered and output from the Y1 terminal, the signal input to the A2 terminal is buffered and output from the Y2 terminal, . . . the signal input to the A8 terminal is buffered. and output from the Y8 terminal.
Note that buffer processing is signal compensation processing such as signal amplification and waveform shaping, and since it mainly deals with pulse signals as digital data, waveform shaping has a great significance. These processes are hereinafter referred to as "buffer processing" or "signal compensation".

The buffer circuit 402 performs signal compensation for the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.
A clock signal S_IN_CLK from the second pin of the connector CN1B is input to the A3 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y3 terminal and supplied to the second pin of the connector CN2B.
A load signal S_IN_LOAD from the fourth pin of the connector CN1B is input to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y1 terminal, and supplied to the fourth pin of the connector CN2B.
The serial data signal S_IN_DATA input to the 6th pin of the connector CN2B from the downstream side is input to the A5 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y5 terminal, and supplied to the 6th pin of the connector CN1B.

Further, the buffer circuit 402 includes the 3rd pin (A2 terminal), the 5th pin (A4 terminal), the 7th pin (A6 terminal), the 8th pin (A7 terminal), the 9th pin (A8 terminal), the 10th pin ( GND terminal) and the 19th pin (G terminal) are grounded. The 11th pin (Y8 terminal), 12th pin (Y7 terminal), 13th pin (Y6 terminal), 15th pin (Y4 terminal), and 17th pin (Y2 terminal) are open.

The buffer circuit 403 performs signal compensation for the clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, the data signal DATA_L, the data signal DATA_M, the enable signal ENABLE_L for the 15th pin, and the enable signal ENABLE_M for the 16th pin.
These signals input from the 9th to 16th pins of the connector CN1B are input to any one of the A1 to A8 terminals of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, and sent to the connector CN2B. It is supplied to the 9th to 16th pins.
The buffer circuit 403 has the 10th pin (GND terminal) and the 19th pin (G terminal) connected to the ground.

As described above, the inner frame LED relay board 400 has the following configuration.
- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD supplied from the effect control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) to the connector CN1B are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 402 and transmitted to the downstream side by the connector CN2B.
The serial data signal S_IN_DATA supplied from the downstream front frame LED connection board 500 to the connector CN2B is signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 402 and transmitted to the upstream side by the connector CN1B.
・Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M supplied to the connector CN1B from the effect control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 403. and transmitted downstream through the connector CN2B.

・Relay the audio signal to the speaker and directly send it to the substrate or speaker unit on the downstream side.
· Power supply voltage is not supplied from the connector CN1B (transmission line H7) connected to the effect control board 30 side (frame LED relay board 840).
12V DC voltage (DC12V) is received from the power supply board 300 through the connector CN4B, and is supplied to the downstream side via the fuse F1B as 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
12V DC voltage (DC12V) is used to generate a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) used in the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the downstream side, which is used as the operating power source for 403 of the buffer circuit 402 and supplied to the downstream side.

In the inner frame LED relay board 400, resistors R1B to R26B, chip resistors RA1B and RA2B, and capacitors C1B to C17B are connected to required locations as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 in addition to the above. .
For example, for clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, resistors R25B, R26B, R8B, R9B, R10B, R11B, R12B, R13B, R14B, and R15B are inserted as damping resistors. Resistors R3B and R2B and chip resistors RA1B and RA2B are inserted as damping resistors on the output side (connector CN2B side).
In this case, if LA is the wiring distance between the connector and the damping resistor, and LB is the wiring distance between the damping resistor and the buffer circuits 402 and 403,
LA < LB
It has a relationship of That is, the damping resistors are arranged closer to the connector (CN1B or CN2B) than the buffer circuits 402 and 403. This improves the signal noise reduction performance.

[5.3 Front frame LED connection board 500]

The front frame LED connection board 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20. FIG. These figures show separately the circuit configuration provided on the front frame LED connection board 500 .

15, connectors CN1C and CN4C in FIG. 16, connector CN3C in FIG. 17, connectors CN7C and CN9C in FIG. 18, and connector CN10C in FIG. is installed.

The connector CN2C in FIG. 15 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H8 that connects with the connector CN2B of the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN2C has 30 terminals from the 1st pin to the 30th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "30", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN2B. Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN2C are also connected to ground. This is due to the mounting strength of the connector, and the conductor points P1 and P2 are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.
Although not mentioned again, conductor points P1 and P2 in housings of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, CN7C, CN8C, CN9C, and CN10C, which will be described later, are also grounded for mounting strength.

A connector CN5C is a connector for connection with a middle right speaker, which is one of the speakers 46 . The 1st and 2nd pins numbered "1" and "2" of this connector CN3B are assigned to the + and - terminals of the right middle speaker, and are connected to the 20th and 22nd pins of the connector CN2C. there is

A connector CN6C is a connector for connection with a left middle speaker, which is one of the speakers 46 . The 1st and 2nd pins numbered "1" and "2" of this connector CN6B are assigned to the + and - terminals of the left middle speaker, and are connected to the 24th and 26th pins of the connector CN2C. there is

A connector CN8C is a connector for connection with an upper right speaker and an upper left speaker, which are one of the speakers 46 . The first and second pins numbered "1" and "2" of this connector CN6B are assigned to the + and - terminals of the upper right speaker, and are connected to the 19th and 21st pins of the connector CN2C. . The third and fourth pins numbered "3" and "4" are assigned to the +terminal and -terminal of the upper left speaker and connected to the 23rd and 25th pins of the connector CN2C.

A connector CN1C in FIG. 16 is a connector that is connected to an LED board (not shown in FIG. 11).
The connector CN4C is also connected to the LED board inside the handle (not shown).

The connector CN1C has 13 terminals from the 1st pin to the 13th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "13".
The 1st and 6th pins are ground terminals, the 2nd pin is a clock signal CLK terminal, the 3rd pin is a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) terminal, the 4th pin is a data signal DATA terminal, and the 5th pin is a reset signal RESET. , and the seventh pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12V).

The eighth to thirteenth pins are R, G, and B LED light emission drive currents (17-R6, 17- G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) input terminals.
This LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) is passed directly from the 2nd pin to the 7th pin of the connector CN4C to another is supplied to the LED substrate in the handle on the downstream side of the .

That is, on the downstream side of the front frame LED connection board 500, an LED board (not shown) and an in-handle LED board are connected by connectors CN1C and CN4C, and an LED driver is mounted on the LED board. The LED driver operates using a clock signal CLK from the connector CN1C, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a data signal DATA, a reset signal RESET terminal, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12V) to drive the LEDs on the LED board. At the same time, LED emission drive currents (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) for the LEDs of the LED board in the handle are also generated. The LED emission drive currents (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) are relayed through the front frame LED connection board 500 and supplied to the LEDs of the LED board in the steering wheel. will be

It should be noted that each of the 2nd to 7th pins of the connector CN4C has is connected to Zener diodes D8C to D15C as a protection circuit.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to the first pin of the connector CN4C, and power supply voltage is supplied to the LED board side in the handle (not shown).

Such a configuration is used so that two LED boards are connected downstream of the front frame LED connection board 500 and only one of them is provided with an LED driver.
That is, the front frame LED connection board 500 outputs a clock signal CLK, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a data signal DATA, a reset signal RESET, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12V) for the operation of the LED driver. Then, the LED light emission drive current from the LED driver is returned, relayed, and sent to the other LED substrate.

In this case, one LED driver is sufficient for driving the two downstream LED substrates. In particular, when light emission is controlled by a common LED drive control signal, it is sufficient to transmit the LED drive control signal only to one of the LED boards, which facilitates simplification of the wiring configuration. In other words, the clock signal CLK, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V), the data signal DATA, the reset signal RESET, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12V) need not be sent to both LED boards.
In addition, by relaying the LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7), a harness that transmits these between the two downstream LED boards becomes unnecessary.

The connector CN3C in FIG. 17 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H9 connecting to the relay board 550 on the downstream side.
This connector CN3C has a 22-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "22".

Five pins of the 1st pin, the 3rd pin, the 11th pin, the 13th pin, and the 18th pin are ground terminals.
The second pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
Three pins of the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 9th pin are terminals of a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

The 4th pin is assigned as the terminal for the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, the 6th pin as the terminal for the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the 8th pin as the terminal for the clock signal S_IN_CLK.

The 10th pin is the enable signal ENABLE_L, the 12th pin is the clear signal CLR_P, the 14th pin is the reset signal RESET_P, the 15th pin is the clock signal CLK_M, the 16th pin is the data signal DATA_P, the 17th pin is the reset signal RESET_M, and the 19th pin. A pin is assigned as a data signal DATA_M, a 20th pin is assigned as a drive general signal 1, a 21st pin is assigned as an enable signal ENABLE_M, and a 22nd pin is assigned as a drive general signal 2.

The connector CN7C in FIG. 18 is connected to a board (not shown) for detecting the cross key 15a, enter key 15b, volume button (not shown), light amount button and the like. This connector CN7C has a 9-terminal configuration of 1st to 9th pins indicated by "1" to "9". Sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, which are detection signals of operations of 15a and the like, are input.
The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 of the 2nd to 9th pins are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via chip resistors RA3C and RA4C.

The connector CN9C is connected to a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15. As shown in FIG. This connector CN9C has a two-terminal configuration indicated by "1" and "2", the first pin receives the sense signal SENS14 from the touch sensor, and the second pin serves as a ground terminal.
The sense signal SENS14 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via a resistor R26C.

The connector CN10C in FIG. 20 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H15 connecting to the button LED connection board 640 in FIG.
This connector CN10C has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin marked with "1" to "20".

Five pins, 2nd pin, 4th pin, 12th pin, 13th pin, and 19th pin, are ground terminals.
The eighth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The sixth pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The fifth pin and the seventh pin are terminals for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V).

The 1st pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ/2, the 3rd pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ/1, the 9th pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ2, the 10th pin is the motor drive signal DCMOT3, and the 11th pin is the motor drive signal MOTφ1. Assigned as a terminal.

The 14th pin is assigned as the terminal for the clear signal CLR_L, the 16th pin as the terminal for the clock signal CLK_L, and the 18th pin as the terminal for the data signal DATA_L.
The 15th pin, 17th pin, and 20th pin are terminals to which sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11, which are detection signals from the downstream side, are input.
The sense signals SENS8, SENS9 and SENS11 are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via a chip resistor RA5C.

The power supply voltage in the front frame LED connection board 500 will be described.
On the front frame LED connection substrate 500, buffer circuits 501, 502, 503, 507 and 508, which are Schmitt trigger buffers containing eight circuits similar to the buffer circuit 402 described above with reference to FIG. Certain buffer circuits 504, 512, 513 are mounted.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of the connector CN2C is used as the power supply voltage for these.

As ICs, the parallel/serial (hereinafter referred to as "P/S") conversion circuits 505 and 506 shown in FIG. 18 are mounted. ) is used.

As an IC, the LED driver 509 of FIG. 19 is mounted, and as a power supply voltage for this, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 27th to 30th pins of the connector CN2C is used.

Motor drivers 510 and 511 shown in FIG. 19 are mounted as ICs, and these use a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) as power supply voltages.
A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a power supply voltage for motor driving, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is used as a power supply voltage for motor drivers such as motor drivers 510 and 511 .

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separate from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). As shown in FIG. 15, a capacitor C11 is inserted between the 27th to 30th pins of the connector CN2C and the ground, and the anode side of a Schottky barrier diode D18C is connected to the positive side of the capacitor C11. there is A resistor R27C, capacitors C12C and C13C, and a chip varistor 515 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D18C and the ground. This configuration isolates the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) as an overvoltage protected power supply voltage.
That is, a power separation/protection circuit 520 is formed to separate the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VA).

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by using the power separation/protection circuit 521 shown in FIG.

The flow of various signals in the front frame LED connection board 500 will be described below.
Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose output port signals (general-purpose signal HANYOU), and enable signal ENABLE_M are transmitted from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the connector CN2C in FIG. It's coming.
These signals are input to terminals A1 to A8 of the buffer circuit 501 and signal-compensated.
Clear signals CLR_L and CLR_M supplied from the inner frame LED relay board 400 are shown as reset signals RESET_L and RESET_M in the front frame LED connection board 500 .

The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the reset signal RESET_L are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 and then supplied to the buffer circuit 504 of FIG. 16 via the chip resistor RA1C. After being buffered, it is output from the connector CN1C to an LED board (not shown).

These clock signal CLK_L, general-purpose signal HANYOU, data signal DATA_L, and reset signal RESET_L signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 shown in FIG. supplied to The signal-compensated outputs of Y5, Y6, Y7 and Y8 terminals of the buffer circuit 502 are relayed from connector CN3C as clock signal CLK_P, enable signal ENABLE_L (from general-purpose signal HANYOU), data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P. Output to substrate 550 .

That is, signals for LED control and the like output from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 are signal-compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 502 and transmitted to the downstream side after the relay board 550 .

The clock signal CLK_P is a constant voltage/protection circuit with a Zener diode D5C and a resistor R19C, the enable signal ENABLE_L is a constant voltage/protection circuit with a Zener diode D4C and a resistor R15C, and the data signal DATA_P is a constant voltage/protection circuit with a Zener diode D6C and a resistor R20C. The protection circuit and the reset signal RESET_P are output from the connector CN3C via a constant voltage/protection circuit consisting of a Zener diode D7C and a resistor R21C.

The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the reset signal RESET_L signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 in FIG. 15 are supplied to the buffer circuit 512 in FIG. After being amplified, they are output as a clock signal CLK_L, a data signal DATA_L, and a clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L) to the button LED connection board 640 from the connector CN10C.

Therefore, the signal for LED control output from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 is compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 512 and transmitted to the downstream side after the button LED connection board 640. Become.

The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU_L signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 in FIG. 15 are supplied to the LED driver 509 in FIG.
The LED driver 509 is a device that outputs a light emission driving current according to the clock signal CLK_L and the data signal DATA_L. In this case, it is mainly used as a serial/parallel (S/P) conversion circuit for driving the motor.
The LED driver 509 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . Seven terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2 and LEDR3 are used. The other output terminal is connected to ground as shown.
And the outputs of output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, and LEDR3 (currents 23-R1, 23-G1, 23-B1, 23-R2, 23-G2, 23-B2, 23-R3) are After being buffered by the buffer circuit 508 , it is supplied to the input terminals IN 1 , IN 2 , IN 3 and IN 4 of the motor driver 510 and the input terminals IN 1 , IN 3 and IN 4 of the motor driver 511 .

In addition, output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, and LEDR3 are designed to flow currents 23-R1, 23-G1, 23-B1, 23-R2, 23-G2, 23-B2, and 23-R3. are connected to a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through chip resistors RA6C and RA7C.

Motor driver 510 outputs motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2 and MOT1-/2 from output terminals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3 and OUT4 based on the signals of input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3 and IN4. Output.
The motor driver 511 outputs motor drive signals MOT3-1, MOT3-3 and MOT3-4 from output terminals OUT1, OUT3 and OUT4 based on signals of input terminals IN1, IN3 and IN4.

Motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/2, MOT3-1 are supplied to connector CN10 of FIG. It is output to the button LED connection board 640 as MOTφ/2 and DCMOT3.
The motor drive signals MOT3-3 and MOT3-4 are supplied to the connector CN3C of FIG.

In the front frame LED connection board 500, the circuit system described above uses the clock signal CLK_L-, the data signal DATA_L-, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU_L- to generate motor drive signals for the downstream button LED connection board 640 and subsequent ones.

The clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_M, enable signal ENABLE_M, and clear signal CLR_M (reset signal RESET_M) input from the connector CN2C in FIG. are supplied to the A1 terminal, A3 terminal, A5 terminal and A7 terminal of the buffer circuit 503 of FIG. The signal-compensated outputs of Y1 terminal, Y3 terminal, Y5 terminal, and Y7 terminal of buffer circuit 503 are output from connector CN3C to relay board 550 as clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_M, enable signal ENABLE_M, and reset signal RESET_M. .

Therefore, signals for motor control from the inner frame LED relay board 400 upstream are compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 503 and transmitted to the downstream side after the relay board 550 .

The clock signal CLK_M is a constant voltage/protection circuit with a Zener diode D12C and a resistor R22C, the enable signal ENABLE_M is a constant voltage/protection circuit with a Zener diode D16C and a resistor R24C, and the data signal DATA_M is a constant voltage/protection circuit with a Zener diode D14C and a resistor R23C. The protection circuit and the reset signal RESET_M are output from the connector CN3C through a constant voltage/protection circuit consisting of a Zener diode D17C and a resistor R25C.

A clock signal S_IN_CLK and a load signal S_IN_LOAD input from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 are supplied to terminals A3 and A2 of the buffer circuit 502 in FIG. The signal-compensated outputs from the Y3 and Y2 terminals of the buffer circuit 502 are output from the connector CN3C to the relay board 550 as the clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD.
Therefore, signals for serial data transmission are compensated by the buffer circuits 501 and 502 and transmitted to the downstream side after the relay board 550 .

The clock signal S_IN_CLK is output from the connector CN3C via a constant voltage/protection circuit consisting of a Zener diode D3C and a resistor R11C, and the load signal S_IN_LOAD is output via a constant voltage/protection circuit consisting of a Zener diode D2C and a resistor R9C.

A serial data signal S_IN_DATAx input from the connector CN3C of FIG. The signal-compensated output from the Y1 terminal of the buffer circuit 502 is input to the SI terminal (serial input terminal) of the P/S conversion circuit 505 in FIG.

A P/S conversion circuit 505 and a P/S conversion circuit 506 in the figure are CMOS 8-bit shift registers, have 8-bit parallel input/output, serial input, and serial output, and perform parallel-to-serial conversion of data. .
When P/S CONT pin = L, 8 pins from Q/D1 pin to Q/D8 pin become parallel output, and SI pin data is stored in each register at the rising edge of CK pin input waveform and Q/D1 pin ~ Output to Q/D8 pin. By setting the CLR/LOAD terminal to L, each register is reset asynchronously with the input of the CK terminal.
When P/S CONT terminal = H, 8 terminals from Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal become parallel input, and when CLR/LOAD terminal = L, Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal input asynchronously with CK terminal input. Data is stored in each register.

In the case of this example, the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 are applied with a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) to the P/S CONT terminal so that the P/S CONT terminal is set to H, and the Q/D1 terminal to Q Eight terminals of the /D8 terminal are used for parallel input.
A clock signal S_IN_CLK and a load signal S_IN_LOAD input from the connector CN2C of FIG. That is, the clock signal S_IN_CLK is input to the CK terminal, and the load signal S_IN_LOAD is input to the CLR/LOAD terminal.

At the Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 505, the sense signal SENS8 is applied to the Q/D1 terminal, the sense signal SENS9 is applied to the Q/D2 terminal, and the sense signal SENS11 is applied to the Q/D4 terminal. , the sense signal SENS14 is input to the Q/D7 terminals.
The Q/D3, Q/D5, Q/D6 and Q/D8 terminals are grounded. That is, each input becomes "0" (L level).
The sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are input from the downstream button LED connection board 640 to the connector CN10C of FIG. It is the detection signal of the sensor.
A sense signal SENS14 is a detection signal of the touch sensor input from the connector CN9C of FIG.

The P/S conversion circuit 505 collectively converts the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx and the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 input as described above into serial data, and outputs the serial data signal SDT1 from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT 1 is input to the SI terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 506 .

At the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals, which are parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 506, the sense signal SENS0 is applied to the Q/D1 terminal, the sense signal SENS1 is applied to the Q/D2 terminal, and the sense signal SENS2 is applied to the Q/D3 terminal. , the Q/D4 terminal receives the sense signal SENS3, the Q/D5 terminal receives the sense signal SENS4, the Q/D6 terminal receives the sense signal SENS5, the Q/D7 terminal receives the sense signal SENS6, and the Q/D8 terminal receives the sense signal SENS7.
These sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are detection signals of the cross key 15a and the like input to the connector CN7C in FIG.
The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 from the connector CN7C are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 507 and input to the above terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 506. FIG.

As described above, the P/S conversion circuit 506 collectively converts the serial data signal SDT1 from the P/S conversion circuit 505 input to the SI terminal and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 into serial data, and outputs Q8 as the serial data signal SDT2. output from the terminal. This serial data signal SDT2 is input to the buffer circuit 513 via a filter comprising a resistor R35C and a capacitor C27C, and buffered. This output is transmitted upstream from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500 .

As described above, the front frame LED connection board 500 has the following configuration.
FIG. 21 shows clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M (reset signals RESET_L, RESET_M), data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose signals HANYOU, and enable signals supplied from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 to the connector CN2C. The flow about ENABLE_M was summarized.

・Clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), data signal DATA_L, and general-purpose signal HANYOU are output as clock signal CLK_P, reset signal RESET_P, data signal DATA_P, and enable signal ENABLE_L by connector CN3C via buffer circuits 501 and 502. sent downstream.
The clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), and data signal DATA_L are transmitted downstream via the buffer circuit 504 from the connector CN1C as the clock signal CLK, reset signal RESET, and data signal DATA.
The clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), and data signal DATA_L are transmitted downstream from the connector CN10C via the buffer circuit 512 as the clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L, and data signal DATA_L.
The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU are supplied to the LED driver 509 and used to generate the motor drive current.

・The clock signal CLK_M, clear signal CLR_M (reset signal RESET_M), data signal DATA_M, and enable signal ENABLE_M are output as clock signal CLK_M, reset signal RESET_M, data signal DATA_M, and enable signal ENABLE_M by connector CN3C via buffer circuits 501 and 503. sent downstream.

・Motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ/1, MOTφ2, MOTφ/2, and DCMOT3 are generated by the LED driver 509, the buffer circuit 508, and the motor drivers 510 and 511 used as S/P conversion circuits, and are transmitted downstream from the connector CN10C. be done.

FIG. 22 summarizes the flow of the serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, and sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14.

- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are transmitted downstream from the connector CN3C via the buffer circuit 502 .
- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied to the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 via the buffer circuit 513 and used for parallel/serial conversion processing.

・The serial data signal S_IN_DATAx input to the connector CN3C from the downstream side is input to the P/S conversion circuit 505 via the buffer circuit 502, and the P/S conversion circuit 505 collects the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14. is converted to serial data and input to the P/S conversion circuit 506 as a serial data signal SDT1. Also, the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 input to the connector CN7C from the downstream side are input to the P/S conversion circuit 506 via the buffer circuit 507. FIG. In the P/S conversion circuit 506, the serial data signal SDT1 from the P/S conversion circuit 505 and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are combined into serial data, and the serial data signal SDT2 is output. This serial data signal SDT2 is transmitted as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500 to the upstream side from the connector CN2C via the buffer circuit 513 .

Further, the front frame LED connection board 500 has the following configuration.
・Relay the audio signal to the speaker and send it to the speaker unit.
・Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through connector CN2C and uses it as an operating power supply.
- The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) used to generate the motor drive signal are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for LED and LED driver, 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) for motor drive, and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) for motor driver. prevent
・12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are supplied to the downstream side as the operating power supply voltage.

15 to 20, the front frame LED connection board 500 includes resistors R1C, R2C . . . , chip resistors RA1C, RA2C . , C2C . . . , diodes (including Zener diodes and Schottky barrier diodes) D1C, D2C .
As a damping resistor for signal lines such as clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose output port signals (general-purpose signal HANYOU), enable signal ENABLE_M, etc., a resistor is provided on the connector CN2C side of FIG. R8C, R10C, R12C, R13C, R14C, R16C, R17C and R18C are inserted, and chip resistors RA1C and RA2C are inserted. That is, the waveform is shaped by inserting damping resistors in the vicinity of the connector CN2C and before the signal branch.
Further, taps TP1C to TP14C are provided as shown in the figure and used for connection to required locations.
Although not shown in the drawings, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise or the like is appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground.

[5.4 Relay board 550]

FIG. 23 shows the structure of the relay board 550. As shown in FIG. Connectors CN1D and CN2D are mounted on the relay board 550 .

The connector CN1D is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H9 connecting to the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1D has 22 terminals from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "22", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN3C. Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN1D are also grounded for mounting strength.

The connector CN2D is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H10 connecting with the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit on the downstream side.
This connector CN2D has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "20".

Four pins of the 3rd pin, the 9th pin, the 11th pin, and the 16th pin are ground terminals.
The first pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
Two pins of the fifth pin and the seventh pin are terminals of a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

The second pin is assigned to the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, the fourth pin to the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin to the clock signal S_IN_CLK.

The 8th pin is the enable signal ENABLE_L, the 10th pin is the clock signal CLK_P, the 12th pin is the reset signal RESET_P, the 13th pin is the clock signal CLK_M, the 14th pin is the data signal DATA_P, the 15th pin is the reset signal RESET_M, and the 17th pin is The pin is assigned as a data signal DATA_M, the 18th pin is assigned as a drive general signal 1, the 19th pin is assigned as an enable signal ENABLE_M, and the 20th pin is assigned as a drive general signal 2.

In this relay board 550, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) assigned to the 5th, 7th and 9th pins of the connector CN1D is applied to the 5th and 7th pins of the connector CN2D. , and forwarded to the downstream side.
In the connector CN1D, five terminals of the 1st pin, the 3rd pin, the 11th pin, the 13th pin, and the 18th pin are used as ground terminals. It has four terminals of the 16th pin.
This reduces the number of terminals of the connector CN2D on the downstream side.
Also, the connector CN1D and the connector CN2D are assumed to be of different types. The connector CN2D has a higher rated current per pin, so the number of power terminals and ground terminals of the connector CN2D can be reduced.
Further, the connector CN2D is easier to insert and remove than the connector CN1D, has thicker terminals, and has a larger housing.

[5.5 Side Unit Upper Right LED Board 600]

24, 25, 26, 27, 28 and 29, the side unit upper right LED board 600 will be described. These figures show separately the circuit configuration provided on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.

24, CN7E in FIG. 25, connectors CN2E and CN3E in FIG. 26, and connectors CN4E, CN5E and CN6E in FIG. 28 are mounted as connectors on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.

The connector CN1E in FIG. 24 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H10 that connects with the connector CN2D of the relay board 550 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1E has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "20", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN2D.

Connector CN7E in FIG. 25 is connected to sensor 101S (see FIG. 55) in side unit device 101 shown in FIG. 10, and sense signal SENS2X is input to the third pin. This sensor 101S is a sensor that detects a player's operation of the side unit device 101, for example. The sense signal SENS2X of the sensor 101S is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R64E.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the power supply voltage of the sensor 101S side of the side unit device 101, is applied to the first pin. The second pin serves as a ground terminal.

The connector CN2E in FIG. 26 is a six-terminal configuration connector to which the transmission line end of the transmission line H12 connecting with the LED board 630 on the side unit on the downstream side is connected.
The first to sixth pins of this connector CN2E are assigned as a ground terminal, a clock signal CLK terminal, a data signal DATA terminal, a reset signal RESET terminal, a ground terminal, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal. .

The connector CN3E is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H11 that connects with the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit on the downstream side.
This connector CN3E has 16 terminals from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16".

The first pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The eighth pin and the thirteenth pin are ground terminals.
The 15th pin is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V). A Zener diode D11E is connected between the 15th pin and the ground as a protection circuit.

2nd pin is clock signal CLK, 3rd pin is sense signal SENS1X, 4th pin is data signal DATA, 5th pin is sense signal SENS_A, 6th pin is reset signal RESET, 7th pin is sense signal SENS_B, 9th pin is A pin is assigned as each terminal of the sense signal SENS_C.
As shown in FIG. 25, the sense signal SENS1X is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R13E.
The sense signal SENS_A, the sense signal SENS_B, and the sense signal SENS_C are also pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through resistors R29E, R27E, and R21E, respectively.

The connector CN3E in FIG. 26 has a motor drive signal MOT1-/2 for the 10th pin, a motor drive signal MOT1-/1 for the 12th pin, a motor drive signal MOT1-2 for the 14th pin, and a motor drive signal MOT1-2 for the 16th pin. Assigned as each terminal of MOT1-1.
Zener diodes D10E, D12E, D13E and D14E are connected as protective circuits between the tenth, twelfth, fourteenth and sixteenth pins and the ground, respectively.

The connector CN4E in FIG. 28 is connected to the side unit upper right movable object motor 104 (see FIG. 10). The connector CN4E has a first pin for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) terminal and a second pin for a vibration control signal L_VIB.

The connector CN5E is connected to the side unit upper right movable solenoid 105 (see FIG. 10). The connector CN5E has a first pin for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) terminal and a second pin for a solenoid control signal L_SOL_01.

Connector CN6E is connected to blower 106 (see FIG. 10) on the side unit. The connector CN6E has a first pin for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) terminal and a second pin for a blower control signal L_BRO.

The conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN2E, CN3E, CN4E, CN5E, CN6E and CN7E are grounded for mounting strength.

The power supply voltage at the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit will be described.
Buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25, buffer circuit 604 in FIG. 26, and buffer circuit 607 in FIG. 28 are mounted as ICs on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. These are 8-circuit Schmitt trigger buffers similar to the buffer circuit 402 previously described in FIG.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is the positive side voltage of the capacitor C1E via the fuse F1E with respect to the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of the connector CN1E in FIG.

As ICs, the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 of FIG. 25 are mounted, and the power supply voltage for these is also a 5 V DC voltage (DC 5 V). P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 are ICs similar to P/S conversion circuit 505 in FIG.

As ICs, the LED driver 605 of FIG. 27 and the LED driver 606 of FIG. 28 are mounted, and as the power supply voltage for them, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 5th pin and the 7th pin of the connector CN1E is used. be done.
In this case, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is taken out from the 5th and 7th pins of the connector CN1E in FIG. 24 as the voltage on the positive electrode side of the capacitor C2E via the fuse F2E.

Motor drivers 608 and 609 in FIG. 28 are mounted as ICs, and these use a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) as power supply voltages.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separate from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
As shown in FIG. 29, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D8E is connected to the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) line. A resistor R23E, capacitors C10E and C11E, and a chip varistor 611 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D8E and the ground. This configuration isolates the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) as an overvoltage protected power supply voltage.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using a circuit consisting of a diode D7E, a resistor R17E, and a capacitor C8E, as shown in the figure.

The flow of various signals in the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit will be described below.
A load signal S_IN_LOAD, a clock signal S_IN_CLK, an enable signal ENABLE_L (reset signal RESET_M), a clock signal CLK_P, a reset signal RESET_P, and a data signal DATA_P are input to the connector CN1E of FIG. 25 through resistors R66E, R9E, R11E, and R12E for signal compensation.
24, resistor R3E and Zener diode D2E, resistor R6E and Zener diode D3E, resistor R66E and Zener diode D15E, resistor R9E and Zener diode D6E, resistor R11E and Zener diode D5E. , a resistor R12E and a Zener diode D15E.

The clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 601, output as the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, and input to the buffer circuit 604 in FIG. In this case, the clock signal CLK_A is input to terminals A1 and A5, the data signal DATA_A is input to terminals A2 and A6, and the reset signal RESET_A is input to terminals A3 and A7.
The buffered signals output from terminals Y1, Y2, and Y3 are output as clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET from connector CN2E via damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E.
The buffered signals output from terminals Y5, Y6, and Y7 are output as clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET from connector CN3E via damping resistors R24E, R25E, and R26E.

That is, the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A shown in FIG. 26 are each branched into two systems before being input to the buffer circuit 604, and buffered respectively. After that, they are output as a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET from connectors CN2E and CN3E to separate boards. Therefore, the buffer circuit 604 performs buffer processing while branching to two systems, and appropriate buffer processing can be performed after each branch.
The clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET output from the connectors CN2E and CN3E are originally the clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P input from the connector CN1E in FIG. . After being buffered by the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 as described above, these signals are output as the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, and branched into two systems at the stage of the buffer circuit 604 in FIG. . In other words, buffer processing is performed before branching, so that attenuation in the transmission line up to that point is compensated for and branched. Stable signal supply is realized when a common signal is distributed to two boards.

The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A output from the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 are also supplied to the LED driver 605 in FIG.
The LED driver 605 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A.
The LED driver 605 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . 14 terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, LEDB4, LEDR5 and LEDG5 are used. The other output terminal is connected to ground as shown.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, LEDB4, LEDR5, and LEDG5 are connected to 14 LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 612, respectively. The light emission drive current (25-R1, 25-G1, 25-B1...25-R5, 25-G5, 25-B5) is applied.
The LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 612 is composed of two or three LEDs (LED1, LED2, . . . ) connected in series and resistor elements, as shown in the drawing. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In this configuration, the clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P input from the connector CN1E of FIG. 24 are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 and branched. The buffered clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A are supplied to the LED driver 605 of FIG. 27 as one branch. The other branched signal is supplied to the buffer circuit 604 of FIG. 26, further branched, and transmitted to the downstream board from the connectors CN2E and CN3E after buffer processing.
In this case, the signal for light emission drive control is buffered by the buffer circuit 601 and then branched for transmission to the LED driver and the downstream board. is becoming

Also, the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_M output from the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. 25 are supplied to the LED driver 606 in FIG.
The LED driver 606 is a device that outputs a light emission driving current according to the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_M. In this case, it mainly functions as a serial/parallel conversion circuit for driving the motor. The LED driver 606 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . Seven terminals of LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3 and LEDG3 are used. The other output terminal is connected to ground as shown.
And the outputs of output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3 (current 30-G1, 30-B1, 30-R2, 30-G2, 30-B2, 30-R3, 30-G3) are After being buffered by the buffer circuit 607 , they are supplied to the input terminals IN 2 , IN 3 and IN 4 of the motor driver 608 and the input terminals IN 1 , IN 2 , IN 3 and IN 4 of the motor driver 609 .

The output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, and LEDG3 are connected to a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through resistors R60E, R61E, R62E, R56E, R57E, R58E, and R59E. This is because currents 30-G1, 30-B1, 30-R2, 30-G2, 30-B2, 30-R3, and 30-G3 are caused to flow using a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) as a power source.

A motor driver 608 outputs a blower control signal L_BRO, a solenoid control signal L_SOL01, and a vibration control signal L_VIB from output terminals OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4 based on signals from input terminals IN2, IN3, and IN4. These blower control signal L_BRO, solenoid control signal L_SOL01, and vibration control signal L_VIB are supplied to connectors CN6E, CN5E, and CN4E, respectively.

Motor driver 609 outputs motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/1 and MOT1-/2 from output terminals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3 and OUT4 based on the signals of input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3 and IN4. Output. These motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-/2 are supplied to connector CN3E in FIG.
Therefore, the circuit from the LED driver 605 to the motor driver 609 forms a circuit system in the side unit upper right LED board 600 that generates a motor drive signal for the side unit lower right LED board 620 on the downstream side.

The load signal S_IN_LOAD and the clock signal S_IN_CLK input from the connector CN1E in FIG. 24 are signal-compensated in the buffer circuit 601 in FIG. It is input to the CLR/LOAD pin and CK pin, and controls parallel/serial conversion processing.
In the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603, the P/S CONT terminal is set to H by applying a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) to the P/S CONT terminal, and the 8 terminals from Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal A terminal is a parallel input.

At the Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 603, the sense signal SENS_C is applied to the Q/D1 terminal, the sense signal SENS_B is applied to the Q/D2 terminal, and the sense signal SENS_A is applied to the Q/D4 terminal. , the sense signal SENS1X is input to the Q/D4 terminal, and the sense signal SENS2X is input to the Q/D5 terminal.
The Q/D6, Q/D7 and Q/D8 terminals are grounded.
Sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, and SENS1X are input from connector CN3E. Sense signal SENS2X is input from connector CN7E.

The P/S conversion circuit 603 collectively converts the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X input as described above into serial data (serial data signal SDT3) and outputs the serial data from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT3 is input to the SI terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 602 .

In the Q/D1 terminal to Q/D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P/S conversion circuit 602, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied to the Q/D1 terminal, Q/D2 terminal, and Q/D8 terminal. is connected to ground.
The P/S conversion circuit 602 combines the serial data signal SDT3 from the P/S conversion circuit 603 input to the SI terminal and the logic (H/L) of the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals into serial data (serial data). It is converted into a data signal SDT4) and output from the Q8 terminal. This serial data signal SDT4 is input to the buffer circuit 601 and buffered. This output is transmitted upstream from connector CN1E via damping resistor R1E in FIG. 24 as serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from upper right LED board 600 of the side unit.

As described above, the side unit upper right LED board 600 has the following configuration.
- An enable signal ENABLE_L (reset signal RESET_M), a clock signal CLK_P, a reset signal RESET_P, and a data signal DATA_P are input, and the buffer circuit 601 performs buffer processing on these. The buffered signal is used for LED light emission, used for generating a motor drive signal, or transferred to the downstream side.

- The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied to the P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 via the buffer circuit 601 and used for parallel/serial conversion processing.
・The various sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X are collectively converted into serial data to generate the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx. This serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is transmitted upstream. As described above, this serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is converted into serial data together with the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS1 in the front frame LED connection board 500, and converted to the serial data signal S_IN_DATA so that the inner frame LED relay board 400 can It will be transmitted to the production control board 30 via.

・Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through connector CN1E and uses it as an operating power supply.
- The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) used to generate the motor drive signal are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
・12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are supplied to the downstream side as the operating power supply voltage.

24 to 29, resistors R1E, R2E . . . , capacitors C1E, C2E . ) are connected to electronic elements such as D1E, D2E, and so on.
Also, as shown in the figure, taps TP1E, TP2E, .
Although not shown in the drawings, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise or the like is appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground.

[5.6 Side unit lower right LED board 620]

The side unit lower right LED board 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. These figures show separately the circuit configuration provided on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.

As connectors, connectors CN1F, CN3F, and CN4F in FIG. 30 and connector CN2F in FIG. 31 are mounted on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.

The connector CN3F in FIG. 30 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H11 that connects with the connector CN3E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN3F has 16 terminals from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN3E.

The connector CN1F is connected to the side unit lower right movable object motor 103 shown in FIG.
A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied to the third and fourth pins. Motor drive signals MOT1-/2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2 and MOT1-1 input from the connector CN3F are output from the first, second, fifth and sixth pins.

The connector CN4F is connected to the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102 shown in FIG.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. A third pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS1X from the connected position detection switch.

The connector CN2F in FIG. 31 is connected to an LED board 625 (not shown in FIG. 11, see FIG. 55) arranged on the side unit 10. As shown in FIG. The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). The 2nd to 5th pins are terminals for light emission driving signals.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN1F, CN2F, CN3F and CN4F are grounded for mounting strength.

The power supply voltage at the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit will be described.
Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are mounted on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the first pin of connector CN3F.

The LED driver 621 of FIG. 31 is mounted as an IC on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 11th pin of the connector CN1E is used as the power supply voltage for this. .
Also, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) output from the connector CN1F in FIG. 30 is supplied from the 15th pin of the connector CN3F.

The flow of various signals in the side unit lower right LED board 620 will be described.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN3F from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 621 in FIG.
The LED driver 621 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 621 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . 12 terminals LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, and LEDB4 are used to drive LED light emission. Also, an LED board (not shown) connected to the connector CN2F is driven to emit light using four output terminals LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8. The other output terminal is connected to ground as shown.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, and LEDB4 are connected to the 12 LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 622, respectively, and the light emission drive current ( 27-R1, 27-G1, 27-B1 ... 27-R4, 27-G4, 27-B4).
Each system of the LED circuit of the light emitting unit 622 is composed of one or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element, as shown. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.
The output terminals LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8 are connected to four systems of the light emission driving section 623. FIG. The light emission driving section 623 outputs four systems of light emission drive currents (27-R7, 27-G7, 27-B7 . . . 27-R8) from the connector CN2F.

Sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are obtained by photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F in FIG. These are transmitted to the side unit upper right LED board 600 from the connector CN3F.
A sense signal SENS1X obtained from the connector CN4F is also transmitted to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit from the connector CN3F.
These sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, and SENS1X are serialized as described above.

In the side unit lower right LED board 620, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, electronic elements such as resistors R1F, R2F, . is connected.
Also, as shown in the figure, taps TP1F, TP2F, .

[5.7 LED board 630 on the side unit]

The side unit upper LED board 630 will be described with reference to FIG.
A connector CN1T is mounted on the LED board 630 on the side unit.
The connector CN1T is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H12 connecting to the connector CN2E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit in FIG.

Therefore, this connector CN1T has a six-terminal configuration from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "6", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN2E.
The conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of the connector CN1T are grounded for mounting strength.

An LED driver 631 is mounted as an IC on the side unit LED board 630, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 6th pin of the connector CN1T is used as the power supply voltage for this.

The flow of various signals will be described.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN1T from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 631 .
The LED driver 631 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 631 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . Nine terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, and LEDB3 are used to drive LED light emission. The other output terminal is connected to ground as shown.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, and LEDB3 are connected to the nine LED circuits formed as the light emitting section 632, respectively, and the light emission driving currents (27-R1, 27- G1, 27-B1 ... 27-R3, 27-G3, 27-B3) flow.
Each system of the LED circuit of the light emitting unit 632 is composed of two LEDs connected in series and a resistance element, as shown in the drawing. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In the side unit LED board 630, as shown in FIG. 32, electronic elements such as resistors R1T, R2T, . . . , capacitors C1T, C2T, . .
Also, as shown in the figure, taps TP1T, TP2T, .

[5.8 Button LED connection board 640]

The button LED connection board 640 will be explained using FIG.
Connectors CN1G, CN2G, CN3G, CN4G, CN5G, CN6G, and CN8G are mounted on the button LED connection board 640 as connectors.

The connector CN1G is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H15 connecting to the connector CN10C of the front frame LED connection board 500 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1E has 20 terminals from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "20", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN10C.

Connector CN2G is connected to the transmission line end of transmission line H16 connecting button LED board 660 shown in FIG.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the power supply voltage of the button LED board 660, is applied to the third pin and the seventh pin. The first pin and the sixth pin are ground terminals.
A second pin, a fourth pin, and a fifth pin are terminals for a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET, respectively.

Connector CN3G is connected to a motor (not shown).
The motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ/1, MOTφ2 and MOTφ/2 input from the connector CN1G are output from the 6th, 2nd, 5th and 1st pins of the connector CN3G.
Also, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) input from the connector CN1G is applied to the third and fourth pins as the illustrated 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12VA).

The connector CN4G is connected to a vibration device (not shown). A 12 V motor drive voltage (MOT12VA) is applied to the first pin as a power supply voltage for the vibrating device, and a motor drive signal DCMOT3 input from the connector CN1G is output to the second pin as a drive signal for the vibrating device. A DC motor is used for the vibration device.

The connector CN5G is connected to a push button sensor inside the effect button 13.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. A third pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS8 from the connected push button sensor.

Connector CN6G is connected to a rotation origin sensor.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS9 from the connected rotation origin sensor.

A connector CN8G is connected to a rotating effect light sensor.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS11 from the connected rotation effect light sensor.

The conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1G, CN2G, CN3G, CN4G, CN5G, CN6G and CN8G are grounded for mounting strength.

A buffer circuit 641 is mounted on the button LED connection board 640 . A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from pin 8 of connector CN1G.

The flow of various signals in the button LED connection board 640 will be described.
The clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L, and data signal DATA_L supplied from the upstream front frame LED connection board 500 to the connector CN1G are input to the buffer circuit 641 via the chip resistor RA1G and buffered. Then, it is sent to the connector CN2G via the chip resistor RA2G and sent to the button LED board 660 downstream.
A capacitor C1G is inserted between the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) of the buffer circuit 641 and the ground.

Although not shown, in the button LED connection board 640, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise and the like is appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground.

[5.9 Button LED board 660]

The button LED board 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. These figures show separately the circuit configuration provided on the button LED board 660 .

The connector CN1H of FIG. 34 is mounted on the button LED board 660. FIG.
The connector CN1H is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H16 connecting to the connector CN2G of the button LED connection board 640 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1H has seven terminals from the first pin to the seventh pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "7", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN2G.
Also, the conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of the connector CN1H are grounded for mounting strength.

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the button LED board 660 as a power supply voltage input to the connector CN1H.
The LED driver 661 of FIG. 34 and the LED driver 663 of FIG. 35 are mounted as ICs on the button LED board 660, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for these.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is also used as the power supply voltage for the light emitting units 664 and 662 .

The flow of various signals in the button LED board 660 will be described.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN1H from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 661 via the chip resistor RA1H in FIG.
The LED driver 661 outputs a light emission drive current according to the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 661 uses output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, .
That is, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . -B1・・・19-R8, 19-G8, 19-B8) flow.
The LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 662 is composed of two or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element, as shown in the drawing. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

The clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET are also supplied to the LED driver 663 in FIG.
The LED driver 663 performs LED light emission drive of six systems using three terminals each of output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, .
That is, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . -B1・・・20-R6, 20-G6, 20-B6) flow.
The LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 664 is composed of two or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element, as shown. A Zener diode is connected in parallel with each LED. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In the side unit lower right LED board 620, resistors R1H, R2H . . . , capacitors C1H, C2H . Electronic elements such as D1H, D2H, etc. (including diodes) are connected.
Also, as shown in the figure, taps TP1H, TP2H, .

[5.10 LED connection board 700]

Next, the board arranged on the game board 3 side will be explained.
First, the LED connection substrate 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 and 41. FIG. These figures show the circuit configuration provided on the LED connection substrate 700 separately.
The LED connection board 700 is a board connected to the effect control board 30 in the game board 3, as shown in FIG.

36, connectors CN5J and CN6J in FIG. 37, connectors CN2J, CN3J, CN4J and CN12J in FIG. 38, connector CN10J in FIG. 39, connectors CN7C and CN11J in FIG. 41 connectors CN8J and CN9J are mounted.

The connector CN1J in FIG. 36 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H20 that connects with the effect control board 30 as shown in FIG.
This connector CN1J has 40 terminals from the 1st pin to the 40th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "40".

1st pin, 2nd pin, 8th pin, 9th pin, 10th pin, 16th pin, 18th pin, 19th pin, 20th pin, 22nd pin, 29th pin, 31st pin of connector CN1J , 32nd, 33rd, 34th, 39th and 40th pins are grounded.
The 4th pin and the 6th pin are terminals for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The 12th pin, the 14th pin, the 24th pin, the 26th pin, the 28th pin, and the 30th pin are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 11th, 17th, 35th and 37th pins are unused.

The third pin is assigned to the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK, the fifth pin to the serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA, and the seventh pin to the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD.
The serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA is serial data transmitted from the LED connection board 700 to the effect control board 30, and the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are supplied from the effect control board 30 for transmitting the serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA. is a signal.

The 13th pin is assigned as a terminal for the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK, and the 15th pin is assigned as a terminal for the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA.
The serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA is serial data transmitted from the performance control board 30 together with the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK.

The 21st pin is the clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), the 23rd pin is the clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), the 25th pin is the serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and the 27th pin is the enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch signal LATCH_M).
The serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA is serial data transmitted from the performance control board 30 together with the clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK.

Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housing of connector CN1J and connectors CN2J, CN4J, CN5J, CN6J, CN7J, CN8J, CN9J, CN10J, CN11J, and CN12J, which will be described later, are grounded for mounting strength.

A connector CN5J in FIG. 37 is connected to a motor of a movable object (not shown). A 18V DC voltage (MOT18VA), which is the power supply voltage of the motor, is applied to the third pin and the fourth pin.
The 1st pin is assigned to the motor drive signal MOT6-/2, the 2nd pin to the motor drive signal MOT6-/1, the 5th pin to the motor drive signal MOT6-2, and the 6th pin to the motor drive signal MOT6-1. It is

The connector CN6J in FIG. 37 is also connected to a motor of another movable object (not shown). A 18V DC voltage (MOT18VA), which is the power supply voltage of the motor, is applied to the third pin and the fourth pin.
The 1st pin is assigned to the motor drive signal MOT7-/2, the 2nd pin to the motor drive signal MOT7-/1, the 5th pin to the motor drive signal MOT7-2, and the 6th pin to the motor drive signal MOT7-1. It is

The connector CN2J in FIG. 38 is connected to the position detection switch of the character. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to the first pin as a power supply voltage on the side of the position detection switch. Let the 3rd pin be a ground terminal.
The second pin of the connector CN2J receives, for example, the sense signal SENSv0, which is the detection signal of the bottom-rear movable object right position detection switch 121 (see FIG. 10). The sense signal SENSv0 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R5J.

The connector CN4J is also connected to the position detection switch of the accessory, the first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal serving as the power supply voltage of the position detection switch, and the third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, the sense signal SENSv1, which is the detection signal of the bottom-rear movable object left position detection switch 125 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of the connector CN4J. The sense signal SENSv1 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R29J.

The connector CN12J is also connected to the position detection switch of the accessory, the first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) which is the power supply voltage of the position detection switch, and the third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, the sense signal SENSv9, which is the detection signal of the bottom-rear movable object top position detection switch 120 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of the connector CN12J. The sense signal SENSv9 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R31J.

Connector CN3J is connected to power supply module board 904 in FIG. 18V DC voltage Vout for 1st pin, 2nd pin and 4th pin, 35V DC voltage (DC35V) for 7th pin, 9th pin and 10th pin, 5th pin, 6th pin and 8th pin for ground Used as each terminal.

The connector CN10J in FIG. 39 is connected to a relay board (not shown). As indicated by the numbers "1" to "32", it has a 32-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 32nd pin. The 2nd pin is a terminal to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied via a fuse F9J, and the 3rd, 4th and 5th pins are terminals to which a 12V motor driving voltage (MOT12V) is applied.
The 9th, 13th, 17th, 21st, 25th, 27th, 29th, 30th, 31st and 32nd pins are grounded.

The 7th pin is assigned to the motor drive signal MOT1-/2, the 8th pin to the motor drive signal MOT1-/1, the 10th pin to the motor drive signal MOT1-2, and the 12th pin to the motor drive signal MOT1-1. It is
The 14th pin is assigned to the motor drive signal MOT2-/2, the 16th pin to the motor drive signal MOT2-/1, the 18th pin to the motor drive signal MOT2-2, and the 20th pin to the motor drive signal MOT2-1. It is
The 22nd pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT3-/2, the 24th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT3-/1, the 26th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT3-2, and the 28th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT3-1. It is

The seventh pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK_B, and the eleventh pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA_B. The 15th pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv2, the 19th pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv3, and the 23rd pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv4.
The sense signal SENSv2 is, for example, the detection signal of the upper movable object position detection switch 132 in FIG. is a signal.

A connector CN7J in FIG. 40 is connected to an LED board (not shown). The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). The fifth and sixth pins are terminals for the 18V LED driving voltage (LED18V). The 4th, 7th and 8th pins are connected to ground.
The second pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK_E, and the third pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA_E.

The connector CN11J is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H30 that connects to the underboard relay board 800 shown in FIG. It has 16 terminals from the first pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16".

The 4th and 6th pins are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied through a fuse F10J, and the 7th and 9th pins are terminals to which a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied through a fuse F11J. is.
The 1st, 15th and 16th pins are connected to the ground.

The 3rd pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-/2, the 5th pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-/1, the 11th pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-2, and the 13th pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-1. be.
The 14th pin is used as a terminal for the sense signal SENSv7. The sense signal SENSv7 is, for example, the detection signal of the lower front movable object position detection switch 123 in FIG.
The 2nd, 8th, 10th and 12th pins are terminals for light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8 and 13-B8.

A connector CN9J in FIG. 41 is connected to an LED board (not shown). The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). The tenth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V). The 4th pin and the 9th pin are connected to the ground.
The second pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK_D, and the third pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA_D.
The 8th, 7th, 6th and 5th pins are terminals for light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8 and 13-B8.
The 14th pin is used as a terminal for the sense signal SENSv8. The sense signal SENSv8 is, for example, the detection signal of the distribution position detection switch 122 in FIG.

The connector CN8J is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H21 connecting to the backside left relay board 720 shown in FIG. It has a 24-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 24th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "24".

1st to 4th pins are terminals to which 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) is applied through fuse F12J, and 5th and 9th pins are terminals to which 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied through fuse F7J. , the 11th pin is a terminal to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is applied through a fuse F8J.
The 7th, 13th, 14th, 19th and 20th pins are grounded.

The 15th pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK_C, and the 17th pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA_C.
6th and 8th pins are motor drive signal MOT5-/2, 10th and 12th pins are motor drive signal MOT5-/1, 16th and 18th pins are motor drive signal MOT5-2, 22nd and 24th pins are the terminals of the motor drive signal MOT5-1. In this case, the motor to be driven is a high-torque motor and is driven by a motor drive voltage of 18V (MOT18VB). Since the power consumption is large, the motor drive signals MOT5-/2, MOT5-/1, MOT5-2 and MOT5-1 each use two pins/lines.
The 21st pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv6, and the 23rd pin is a terminal for the sense signal SENSv5. The sense signal SENSv6 is, for example, the detection signal of the lower-back movable object lower-left position detection switch 128 in FIG.

The power supply voltage in this LED connection board 700 will be described.
The LED connection board 700 includes, as ICs, the buffer circuits 703 and 704 of FIG. A circuit 705 and buffer circuits 707 and 708 of FIG. 41 are mounted.
As the power supply voltage for these, as shown in FIG. 36, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) based on the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the connector CN1J is used.

As ICs, the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 of FIG. 36 are mounted, and a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. A 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is taken out from the positive side of the capacitor C4J from the connector CN1J via the fuse F1J. The P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 are ICs similar to the P/S conversion circuit 505 in FIG.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) output downstream from connectors CN2J, CN4J, CN7J, CN8J, CN10J, CN11J, and CN12J is taken out from the positive side of capacitor C5J via fuse F2J from connector CN1J.

Motor drivers 710 to 713 shown in FIG. 37 are mounted as ICs on the LED connection board 700, and 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used as power supply voltages for these.
Furthermore, motor drivers 714, 715, and 716 are mounted, and 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used as power supply voltages for these.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by power isolation/protection circuit 790 .
As shown in FIG. 36, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D5J is connected to the 12th, 14th, 24th, 26th, 28th and 30th pins of the connector CN1J. . A resistor R6J, capacitors C14J and C15J, and a chip varistor 709 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D5J and the ground. Due to the configuration of this power supply isolation/protection circuit 790, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is isolated as the overvoltage protected power supply voltage.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using the circuit of diode D1J, resistor R1J and capacitor C3J shown in FIG.

The 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA), 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB), and 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) are separated from the 18V DC voltage Vout input from connector CN3J as also shown in FIG.
The anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D7J is connected via the fuse F3J to the first, second and fourth pins to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied. A resistor R7J and capacitors C17J and C18J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D7J and the ground. This configuration extracts the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA).
Similarly, the anode side of a Schottky barrier diode D9J is connected via a fuse F4J to the first, second and fourth pins to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied. A resistor R8J and capacitors C20J and C21J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D9J and the ground. This arrangement extracts the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB).
Similarly, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D11J is connected via a fuse F5J to the first, second and fourth pins to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied. A resistor R9J and capacitors C23J and C24J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D11J and the ground. This configuration yields an 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V).

The flow of various signals in the LED connection board 700 will be described below.
A clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and a serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are transmitted from the production control board 30 to the connector CN1J of FIG. These are signals used for downstream operation control of the LED connection board 700 .

The clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are input to terminals A5 and A7 of the buffer circuit 703 and signal-compensated as indicated by the clock signal CLK_P and the serial data signal DATA_P in FIG.
Then, the signals are output from terminals Y5 and Y7 of the buffer circuit 703, and input to the buffer circuit 706 in FIG. Then, they are transmitted downstream from the connector CN7J as shown as a clock signal CLK_E and a serial data signal DATA_E.

The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A output from the Y5 terminal and Y7 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 are also input to the buffer circuit 705 in FIG. It is sent downstream as DATA_B.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are also input to the buffer circuit 707 in FIG. 41, buffered, and transmitted downstream from the connector CN9J as the clock signal CLK_D and the serial data signal DATA_D.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are also input to the buffer circuit 708 in FIG. 41, buffered, and transmitted from the connector CN8J as the clock signal CLK_C and the serial data signal DATA_C to the backside left relay board 720 on the downstream side. be done.

From the production control board 30, the connector CN1J in FIG. ) is sent.
These are used for control for motor drive.
These signals are input to terminals A7, A1, A3, and A5 of the buffer circuit 704 for signal compensation. Then, they are input to the motor drivers 710 to 716 of FIG. 37 through the chip resistor RA4J.
That is, in each of the motor drivers 710 to 716, the reset signal RESET_M is input to the RESET terminal, the latch signal LATCH_M is input to the LATCH terminal, the clock signal CLK_M is input to the SCLK terminal, and the serial data signal DATA_M is input to the SDIN terminal.

The motor drivers 710 to 713 generate 12V motor drive signals according to these inputs.
That is, the motor driver 710 generates motor drive signals MOT1-/2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, MOT1-1 that are output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 711 generates motor drive signals MOT2-/2, MOT2-/1, MOT2-2, MOT2-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 712 generates motor drive signals MOT3-/1, MOT3-2, MOT3-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 713 generates motor drive signals MOT4-/2, MOT4-/1, MOT4-2, and MOT4-1 that are output from the connector CN11J.

Also, the motor drivers 714 to 716 similarly generate 18V motor drive signals according to the inputs of the reset signal RESET_M, the latch signal LATCH_M, the clock signal CLK_M, and the serial data signal DATA_M.
That is, the motor driver 714 generates motor drive signals MOT5-/2, MOT5-/1, MOT5-2, and MOT5-1 output from the connector CN8J.
The motor driver 715 generates motor drive signals MOT6-/2, MOT6-/1, MOT6-2 and MOT6-1 output from the connector CN5J.
The motor driver 716 generates motor drive signals MOT7-/2, MOT7-/1, MOT7-2 and MOT7-1 output from the connector CN6J.

A clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and a load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are transmitted from the performance control board 30 to the connector CN1J of FIG.
A clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and a load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are input to terminals A3 and A2 of the buffer circuit 703 for signal compensation. Then, the signals are input from the Y3 terminal and Y2 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 to the CK terminal and CLR/LOAD terminal of the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 via the chip resistor RA1J.
In the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied to the P/S CONT terminals so that the P/S CONT terminals are set to H, and the Q/D1 to Q/D8 terminals 8 terminals are used as parallel inputs. The P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 perform parallel-serial conversion according to the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD.

A Q/D1 terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 701 receives the sense signal SENSv8 from the connector CN9J in FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, this sense signal SENSv8 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R23J.
Sense signal SENSv9 from connector CN12J in FIG.
The inputs to the Q/D3 to Q/D7 terminals are ground level "0" (L level), and the Q/D8 terminal is set to the 5V level "1" (H level).
The P/S conversion circuit 702 converts the above parallel input into serial data (serial data signal SDT5) and outputs it from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT 5 is input to the SI terminal of the P/S conversion circuit 702 .

Sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv7 are input to eight terminals Q/D1 to Q/D8 of the P/S conversion circuit 702 . Sense signal SENSv0 is input from connector CN2J. Sense signal SENSv1 is input from connector CN4J. Sense signals SENSv2 to SENSv4 are input from connector CN10J. Sense signals SENSv5 and SENSv6 are input from connector CN8J. Sense signals SENSv5 and SENSv7 are input from connector CN11J.
The sense signals SENSv2 to SENSv7 are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through resistors R24J, R2J and chip resistor RA3J, respectively.

As described above, the P/S conversion circuit 702 collectively converts the serial data signal SDT5 from the P/S conversion circuit 701 input to the SI terminal and the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv7 into serial data (serial data signal SDT6). Output from Q8C pin. This serial data signal SDT6 is input to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 and buffered. And Y1 output is supplied to the 3rd pin of connector CN1J via chip resistance RA1J, and is transmitted to the upstream production control board 30 as a serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA from the LED connection board 700 concerned.

As described above, the LED connection board 700 has the following configuration.
・The sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9 input from the downstream side are converted into serial data, and transmitted as serial data signals P_S_IN_DATA from the connector CN1J to the upstream side via the buffer circuit 703.
- The clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA transmitted from the performance control board 30 are transferred to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703 and the buffer circuit (one of 705, 706, 707, 708).

・Clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch signal LATCH_M) sent from the effect control board 30 are buffered. Motor drivers 710 to 716 are supplied via circuit 704, and motor drive signals (MOT1-/2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-2, MOT1-1...MOT7-/2, MOT7-/1, MOT7- 2, MOT7-1) is generated and sent to the downstream side (motor).

・Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) through connector CN1J and uses it as an operating power supply.
・The 18V DC voltage Vout is received by the connector CN3J and used as an 18V operating power source (high brightness LED and high torque motor operating power source).
・12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5V), 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V), and 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) are supplied downstream as operating power supply voltages.

In the LED connection board 700, resistors R1J, R2J . . . , chip resistors RA1J, RA2J . , diodes (including Zener diodes and Schottky barrier diodes) D1J, D2J, and other electronic elements are connected.
Also, as shown in the figure, taps TP1J, TP2J, .
Although not shown in the drawings, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise or the like is appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground.

[5.11 Board Back Left Relay Board 720]

FIG. 42 shows the configuration of the board rear left relay board 720 . Connectors CN1K and CN2K are mounted on the backside left relay board 720 .

The connector CN1K is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H21 connecting to the connector CN8J of the LED connection board 700 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1K has 24 terminals from the 1st pin to the 24th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "24", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN8J.

The connector CN2K is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H22 that connects with the decorative substrate 740 on the downstream side.
This connector CN1B has a 22-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "22".

The 4th pin, the 7th pin, and the 10th pin are ground terminals.
The sixth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V).
The eighth and ninth pins are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 11th, 12th, 13th and 14th pins are terminals for an 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB).

The fifth pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK_C, and the third pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA_C.
15th and 16th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-/2, 17th and 18th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-/1, 19th and 20th pins are motor drive signals MOT5-2, 21st and 22nd pins are the terminals of the motor drive signal MOT5-1.
The second pin is the terminal for the sense signal SENSv6, and the first pin is the terminal for the sense signal SENSv5.

Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1K and CN2K are grounded for mounting strength.

In this panel rear left relay board 720, the ground terminals of the 7th, 13th, 14th, 19th and 20th pins of the connector CN1K are connected to the 4th, 7th and 10th pins of the connector CN2K side. As 3 terminals of pins, the connector is converted from 24 terminals to 22 terminals. This reduces the number of terminals of the connector CN2D on the downstream side.

[5.12 Decorative substrate 740]

The decoration substrate 740 will be explained using FIG.
The decoration board 740 is mounted with connectors CN1L, CN2L, CN3L, CN4L, CN5L, and CN6L.

The connector CN1L is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H22 connecting to the connector CN2K of the backside left relay board 720 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1L has 22 terminals from the first pin to the 22nd pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "22", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN2K.
The conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1K to CN6K are grounded for mounting strength.

The connector CN2L is connected to a position detection switch of a movable object (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. A second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv5 from the connected position detection switch.

The connector CN3L is connected to another position detection switch of the movable object (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. A second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv6 from the connected position detection switch.

The connector CN4L is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H23 connecting to the relay board 760 shown in FIG. As indicated by the numbers "1" to "14", it has a 14-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 14th pin.

The 1st, 2nd and 3rd pins are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied, and the 12th, 13th and 14th pins are terminals to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied.
The 4th, 5th, 7th, 8th, 10th and 11th pins are grounded.
The sixth pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK_C, and the ninth pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA_C.
A flexible cable (for example, a flexible flat cable) is connected to the connector CN4L as the transmission line H23. Since the flexible cable has a small rated current, the number of power supply terminals and ground terminals is made larger than those of the connector CN1L.

The connector CN5L is connected to a motor of a movable object (not shown).
The third and fourth pins are terminals to which a 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V) is applied.
The first pin is for the motor drive signal MOT5-/2, the second pin is for the motor drive signal MOT5-/1, the fifth pin is for the motor drive signal MOT5-2, and the sixth pin is for the motor drive signal MOT5-1. be.

The connector CN6L is connected to a movable LED board (not shown).
A first pin and a second pin are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied.
The 3rd pin to the 24th pin are light emission drive current terminals for 22 systems of light emission drive currents 09-R1, 09-G1, 09-B1, . . . 09-R8, and 09-G8.

A buffer circuit 741, which is a triple buffer gate, is mounted on the decorative substrate 740. FIG. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 6th pin of connector CN1L.

Also, an LED driver 742 is mounted, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the eighth and ninth pins of the connector CN1L.

The 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V) supplied downstream from the connector CN5L is obtained from the 11th to 14th pins of the connector CN1L.

The flow of various signals in the decoration board 740 will be described.
A clock signal CLK_C and a data signal DATA_C supplied to the connector CN1L from the upstream backside left relay board 720 are input to the buffer circuit 741 and buffered. Then, it is sent to the connector CN4L and sent to the downstream relay board 760 .

The clock signal CLK_C and data signal DATA_C are also supplied to the LED driver 742 .
The LED driver 742 uses output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, .
These output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDR8, LEDG8 are connected to the 3rd to 24th pins of the connector CN6L, and are connected to the 22 LED circuits on the movable LED board (not shown). 09-R1, 09-G1, 09-B1, . . . 09-R6, 09-G6, 09-B6).

As described above, the decoration substrate 740 has the following configuration.
- Transfer the clock signal CLK_C and data signal DATA_C transmitted from the upstream side to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703 .
- The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA are also used by the LED driver 742 . The LED driver 742 drives the light emitting portions of the other LED boards to emit light.

・Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through connector CN1L and uses it as an operating power supply.
・12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) are supplied to the downstream side as the operating power supply voltage.

In the decoration board 740, electronic elements such as resistors R1L, R2L, . . . , capacitors C1L, C2L, .
Also, taps TP1L and TP2L are provided as shown in the figure and used for connection to required locations.

[5.13 Relay board 760]

FIG. 44 shows the configuration of the relay board 760. As shown in FIG. Connectors CN1M, CN2M, and CN3M are mounted on the relay board 760 .

The connector CN1M is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H23 connecting to the connector CN4L of the decoration board 740 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1M has 14 terminals from the 1st pin to the 14th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "14", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN4L.

The connector CN2M is connected with an LED board (not shown).
The fourth and sixth pins are ground terminals.
The fifth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V).
The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The second pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA.

The connector CN3M is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H24 connecting to the LED substrate 780 on the downstream side.
This connector CN1B has six terminals from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "6".
The fourth and sixth pins are ground terminals.
The fifth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V).
The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The second pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN1M, CN2M and CN3M are grounded for mounting strength.

This relay board 760 is mounted with a buffer circuit 761, which is a Schmitt trigger buffer containing eight CMOS circuits, similar to the buffer circuit 402 of FIG. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 12th, 13th and 14th pins of the connector CN1M.

A clock signal CLK_C and a data signal DATA_C supplied from the upstream decoration board 740 to the connector CN1M are input to terminals A1 and A2 of the buffer circuit 761 and signal-compensated. Then, they are output from terminals Y1 and Y2, and transmitted downstream as a clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA through a connector CN2M.
The clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are also input to terminals A5 and A6 of the buffer circuit 761 and are signal-compensated. Then, they are output from terminals Y5 and Y6, and transmitted to the downstream LED substrate 780 as a clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA through the connector CN3M.

Therefore, the decoration board 740 buffers the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C and then transmits them to the two downstream LED boards (the LED board 780 and the LED board not shown).

[5.14 LED board 780]

FIG. 45 shows the configuration of the LED board 780 . Connectors CN1N and CN2N are mounted on the LED board 780 .

The connector CN1N is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H24 connecting to the connector CN3M of the relay board 760 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1N has a six-terminal configuration from the first pin to the sixth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "6", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN3M.

The connector CN2N is connected with an LED board (not shown).
The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
A fourth pin serves as a ground terminal.
The second pin is the terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is the terminal for the data signal DATA.

Conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1N and CN2N are grounded for mounting strength.

A buffer circuit 781 that is a triple buffer gate is mounted on the LED substrate 780 . A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the fifth pin of connector CN1N.

Also, an LED driver 782 is mounted, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for this. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the first pin of connector CN1N.

The flow of various signals in the LED board 780 will be described.
A clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA supplied from the upstream relay board 760 to the connector CN1N are input to the buffer circuit 781 and buffered. Then, it is sent to the connector CN2N and sent to the LED board 790 downstream.

The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA are also supplied to the LED driver 782 .
The LED driver 782 performs LED light emission drive of 22 systems using output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, .
These output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, . 03-B1 ... 03-G7, 03-B7, 03-R8) flow.
The LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 783 is composed of two or three LEDs (LED1, LED2, . . . ) connected in series and resistor elements, as shown in the drawing. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

As described above, the LED board 780 has the following configuration.
• Transfer the clock signal CLK and data signal DATA sent from the upstream side to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 781 .
The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA are also used by the LED driver 782 to drive the light emitting section 783 to emit light.

・Receives 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) through connector CN1N and uses it as an operating power supply.
・12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the downstream side as the operating power supply voltage.

In the LED board 780, electronic elements such as resistors R1N, R2N, . . . , capacitors C1N, C2N, .
Further, taps TP1N and TP2N are provided as shown in the figure, and used for connection to required locations.

Although illustration of the LED board 790 on the downstream side of the LED board 780 is omitted, roughly speaking, the LED board 780 has the buffer circuit 781 and the connector CN2N removed. That is, the LED substrate 790 has an LED driver and a light emitting section, and is configured to drive LED light emission based on the input clock signal CLK and data signal DATA.
An LED driver and LEDs are mounted on the LED board 790, but no buffer circuit is mounted. Therefore, only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the connector CN2N to the LED substrate 790, and the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. That is, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is based on the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the effect control board 30 (see the 6th pin of the connector CN1J in FIG. 36), and is supplied to the LED board 780 where the buffer circuit is provided. It has a configuration that

[5.15 Board Back Bottom Relay Board 800]

FIG. 46 shows the configuration of the board rear lower relay board 800 . Connectors CN1Q, CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q are mounted on the board rear lower relay board 800 .

The connector CN1Q is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H30 connecting to the connector CN11J of the LED connection board 700 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1Q has 16 terminals from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "16", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN11J.

Connector CN2Q is connected to movable object motor 830 (see FIG. 58).
The third and fourth pins are terminals to which a 12V motor driving voltage (MOT12V) is applied.
The first pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-/2, the second pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-/1, the fifth pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-2, and the sixth pin is for the motor drive signal MOT4-1. be.

The connector CN3Q is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H31 connecting to the decorative substrate 820 on the downstream side.
This connector CN3Q has 10 terminals from the 1st pin to the 10th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "10".
The 1st to 6th pins are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 7th pin, 8th pin, 9th pin, and 10th pin are terminals for light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.
A flexible cable (for example, a flexible flat cable) is connected to this connector CN3Q as the transmission line H31, and the rated current is small. For example, the number of terminals (6) for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on connector CN3Q is greater than the number of terminals (2) for 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on connector CN1Q.

Connector CN4Q is connected to position detection switch 831 (see FIG. 58).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. A second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv7 from the connected position detection switch.

The conductor points P1 and P2 on the housings of the connectors CN1Q, CN2Q, CN3Q and CN4Q are grounded for mounting strength.

In this board rear lower relay board 800, signals and voltages supplied from the connector CN1Q are distributed downstream by the connectors CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q.
In the connector CN1Q, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is input through two terminals of the 4th pin and the 6th pin, but in the connector CN3Q, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is input downstream through the 6 terminals of the 1st pin to the 6th pin. sending. As a result, the number of downstream terminals (the total number of terminals of connectors CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q) is greater than the number of upstream terminals (the number of terminals of connector CN1Q).

[5.16 Decorative substrate 820]
The decorative substrate 820 will be explained using FIG.
A connector CN1S is mounted on the decorative substrate 820. As shown in FIG.
The connector CN1S is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H31 that connects with the connector CN3Q of the underboard relay board 800 in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1S has ten terminals from the 1st pin to the 10th pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "10", and the terminal assignments are the same as those of the connector CN3Q.

A decoration substrate 820 is provided with a light-emitting portion 821 having four LED circuits, which are driven to emit light by light-emitting drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8 through connectors CN1S, respectively. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied via a connector CN1S is applied to the anode side of the LED of the light emitting portion 821 .
This decorative substrate 820 is arranged in a movable body (not shown) and is used as a substrate for LED light emission of the movable body portion.

<6. Description of Noteworthy Configuration>

Among the configurations of the gaming machine 1 described so far, the configurations to be noted will be sequentially described below.

[6.1 Serial data signal between inner frame 2 and door 6]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A1-1).
(Configuration A1-1)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a plurality of detection means attached to the door 6, and The first board converts detection signals from the plurality of detecting means into serial data signals and transmits the serial data signals to other boards.

In the case of the concept of (configuration A1-1), the front frame LED connection board 500, the side unit upper right LED board 600, or the LED connection board 700 can be cited as an example corresponding to the first board.
The sense signals are the sense signals SENS0-SENS14, the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, the sense signals SENSv0-SENSv9, etc. Therefore, the plural sensing means are the respective devices that generate these sense signals. Specifically, they are a switch such as a position detection switch, operation means for production such as the production button 13, the cross key 15a, the decision button 15b, and a sensor such as a touch sensor.

The first substrate converts a plurality of detection signals from various detection means such as switches, buttons, and sensors into serial data signals and outputs the serial data signals, thereby reducing the number of wirings for sense signals.
Further, even if the door 6 is provided with a large number of sensors, switches, etc., it is possible to prevent the number of wires from becoming enormous. In other words, the wiring structure can be kept from being complicated while the effect means and the detection means are abundantly arranged on the door 6 closest to the player.

Here are some specific examples. The front frame LED connection board 500 shown in FIGS. 15 to 22 converts data into serial data by P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506, as described mainly with reference to FIGS. Then, the resulting serial data signal S_IN_DATA is transmitted to the inner frame LED relay board 400 through the transmission line H8.
Thereby, the number of wirings of the transmission line H8 can be reduced. In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 combines the serial data signals from the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14, and furthermore, the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are collectively converted into serial data. The effect of reducing the number of wiring is large.

The upper right LED board 600 of the side unit shown in FIGS. 24 to 29 converts the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X into serial data by P/S conversion circuits 602 and 603 in FIG. Then, the resulting serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is sent to the relay board 550 through the transmission line H10, and further sent to the front frame LED connection board 500 through the transmission line H9.
Thereby, the number of wirings of the transmission lines H9 and H10 can be reduced.

36 to 41, the P/S conversion circuits 701 and 702 in FIG. 36 convert the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9 into serial data. And the resulting serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA is transmitted to the effect control board 30 through the transmission line H20.
Thereby, the number of wirings of the transmission line H20 can be reduced.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A1-2) in addition to (configuration A1-1).
(Configuration A1-2)
Another board that transmits the serial data signal is the board attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member).

In the case of this (structure A1-2) concept, the front frame LED connection board 500 corresponds to the first board, and the inner frame LED relay board 400 corresponds to the other board.
The front frame LED connection board 500 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are electrically connected by a transmission line H8 with the door 6 opened as shown in FIG.
In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 performs serial data conversion as described above, so that a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wires in the harness (transmission line H8) that connects the wiring of the opening/closing portion of the door 6. can be transmitted. This makes it possible to avoid excessive wiring in the movable portion. In addition, by reducing the number of wires, it becomes easier to improve the flexibility of the harness, and to improve the durability and reliability, and it is easy to realize suitable wiring in movable parts.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-1).
(Configuration A2-1)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a plurality of first detection means attached to the door 6, and a door. a first substrate attached to the door 6; and a second substrate attached to the door 6 below the first substrate. The signal is converted into a signal and transmitted to the second substrate.
The plurality of first detection means and the first substrate are attached to the upper region of the door 6, for example.

In the case of this (structure A2-1) concept, the following can be considered as an example corresponding to the first substrate and the second substrate.
・First board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: front frame LED connection board 500
Note that "transmitting to the second board" includes both direct transmission to the second board and transmission to the second board via another board.

Further, examples corresponding to the first detection means include detection means such as sensors that generate the sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C. These detection means are arranged in the upper area of the door 6 . The upper region of the door 6 means a region in the vertical direction of the door 6, which is above the bottom line UL of the game board 3 shown in FIG. 10, for example.

Sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are detection signals obtained by photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F arranged on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit in FIG. The sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are input from the connector CN3E to the connector CN3E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit in FIG.
Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are shown in FIG. 10, and these are sensors for determining the operation state of the movable object moved by the side unit lower right movable object motor 103. FIG.

The sense signal SENS1X is a detection signal generated by the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102 shown in FIG. This sense signal SENS1X is input from the connector CN3E through the connectors CN4F and CN3F of FIG. 30 to the connector CN3E of the side unit upper right LED board 600 of FIG.

The sense signal SENS2X is input to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit from the connector CN7E in FIG. Connector CN7E is connected to the sensor of side unit device 101 shown in FIG.

The detection means (photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, PC3F, position detection switch 102, sensor of side unit device 101) that generate these sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C above).

Therefore, as an example corresponding to the first board, the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit aggregates the sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C of the detection means arranged in the upper area of the door 6, converts them into serial data, and converts them into serial data. 550 to the front frame LED connection board 500 corresponding to the second board.

By serializing multiple sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C that are close in arrangement in this way, multiple detections by various detection means such as sensors, switches, and buttons that exist above the door 6 can be performed. The signal can be efficiently converted into a serial data signal, the wiring efficiency for the detection signals from various places can be improved, the number of wirings can be reduced, and the wiring length can be shortened.

In addition, in the configuration having the relay board 550 as shown in FIG. Of course, the configuration may be such that the side unit upper right LED board 600 directly transmits to the front frame LED connection board 500 .

The term "upper part of the door 6" is not defined as being above the bottom line UL, but is defined as being above the center line in the vertical direction of the door 6, for example. It is also possible to conceive of a configuration in which the detection signals are collectively converted into serial data on the upper board.
Furthermore, the "left part of the door 6" means the left part of the center line of the door 6 in the left-right direction. It is also possible to conceive of a configuration in which the data are collectively converted into serial data.
Further, the "right part of the door 6" means the right part of the center line of the door 6 in the left-right direction. It is also possible to conceive of a configuration in which the data are collectively converted into serial data.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-2) in addition to (configuration A2-1).
(Structure A2-2)
The game machine 1 includes a third substrate attached to an inner frame 2 (frame member) and one or more second detection means attached below the first detection means to a door 6 (door member). wherein the second substrate collectively converts the detection signal of the second detection means and the serial data signal from the first substrate into a serial data signal and transmits the serial data signal to the third substrate. It is

in this case,
・First board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: front frame LED connection board 500
・Third board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
can be considered.
In other words, in addition to converting the side unit upper right LED board 600 into serial data as an example corresponding to the first board, the front frame LED connection board 500 corresponding to the second board also further converts to serial data, and the inner frame LED relay is performed. It is configured to transmit to the substrate 400 .

Examples corresponding to the second detection means include detection means such as switches that generate the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14.
These detection means are arranged below the detection means that generate the sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C described above.

The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are detection signals generated by detection means such as operation detection switches such as the cross key 15a and the decision button 15b. The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are input to the front frame LED connection board 500 from the connector CN7C in FIG.

Sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are input from the button LED connection board 640 to the front frame LED connection board 500. FIG.
The sense signal SENS8 is, for example, a detection signal generated by a push button sensor in the effect button 13.
The sense signal SENS9 is a detection signal generated by a rotation origin sensor in the effect button 13, for example.
The sense signal SENS11 is, for example, a detection signal generated by a rotating effect light sensor in the effect button 13. FIG.

The sense signal SENS14 is a detection signal generated by a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 and input to the front frame LED connection board 500 through the connector CN9C.

The front frame LED connection board 500 converts these sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 to the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the side unit upper right LED board 600 by the P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 of FIG. are combined into serial data. And it outputs toward the production control board 30 as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500 .
Therefore, a plurality of detection signals from various detection means such as sensors, switches, and buttons existing in the upper area of the door are collected by the side unit upper right LED board 600, and detection signals from the detection means below them are collected from the side unit upper right side. The front frame LED connection board 500 arranged below the LED board 600 is used to combine them.

In this way, by serializing data step by step on each board according to the position of the detection means, the detection signals of the detection means located above and below the door can be efficiently converted into serial data signals. It is possible to improve wiring efficiency for detection signals from various places and reduce the number of wirings. Also, the wiring length can be shortened.
Further, as a result, a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wires in the harness (transmission line H8) that connects the wires of the opening/closing portion of the door.
As a result, even when a large number of detection means are mounted on the door 6, the reliability of the wiring in the movable portion can be improved.

In this example, a plurality of detecting means such as switches for generating the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 are cited as examples corresponding to the second detecting means. (Structure A2-2) is useful even if is single.
For example, the front frame LED connection board 500 converts one sense signal into serial data together with the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and outputs it as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA to the effect control board 30. is also conceivable.

In addition to (configuration A2-1) or (configuration A2-2), the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-3).
(Structure A2-3)
The second board includes: a first buffer circuit for buffering a serial data signal from the first board; a serial data signal output from the first buffer circuit and a detection signal from the second detection means; into a serial data signal; a second buffer circuit for buffering the serial data signal obtained by the conversion means; and a serial data signal output from the second buffer circuit. and output means for transmitting toward a third substrate.

Examples corresponding to the first buffer circuit, the second buffer circuit, the output means, and the conversion means can be considered as follows.
- First buffer circuit: Buffer circuit 502 shown in FIGS. 17 and 22
• Second buffer circuit: the buffer circuit 513 shown in FIGS.
・Output means: connector CN2C shown in FIG.
Conversion means: circuit portion including P/S conversion circuit 505 and P/S conversion circuit 506 shown in FIG.

In this case, attenuation of the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx transmitted by the buffer circuit 502 can be compensated for, thereby improving the stability of the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from downstream. In this state, P/S conversion circuits 505 and 506 can collectively convert them into serial data. Further, buffer processing by the buffer circuit 513 enables signal compensation for transmission of the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.
As described above, it is possible to convert the data into serial data while securing stable data, and to maintain the signal quality of the serial data sent to the effect control board 30 .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A3-1).
(Structure A3-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a decoration unit attached to the door 6, and a decoration unit attached to the decoration unit. a plurality of first detection means, a first substrate attached to the decoration unit, and a second substrate attached to a portion of the door 6 outside the decoration unit; A detection signal from each of the plurality of first detection means is converted into a serial data signal and transmitted to the second substrate.
The decoration unit is replaceably attached to the door 6, for example.

In the case of this (structure A3-1) concept, the side unit 10 can be cited as an example corresponding to the decoration unit.
An example corresponding to the first board is the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and an example corresponding to the second board is the front frame LED connection board 500 .
A front frame LED connection board 500 is provided in the door 6 but not in the side unit 10 .
The side unit upper right LED board 600, which is the first board, transmits the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx to the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the second board (via the relay board 550). It should be noted that, of course, the configuration may be such that the relay board 550 does not exist and the data is directly transmitted.

The first detection means are a plurality of detection signals attached to the side unit 10, and correspond to the detection means that generate the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X.
Detecting means for generating sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F shown in FIGS.
The detection means for generating the sense signal SENS1X is the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102 (see FIG. 10) connected to the connector CN4F in FIG.
The detection means for generating the sense signal SENS2X is the side unit device 101 (see FIG. 10) connected to the connector CN7E of FIG. , the side unit device 101 is provided in the side unit 10 .

When the side unit 10 is replaceable with respect to the door 6, the side unit 10 is also provided with substrates and detection means such as sensors, switches, buttons, etc., and signals are transmitted between the side unit 10 and the substrate on the side of the door 6. will be
In this case, the side unit upper right LED board 600 (first board) arranged in the side unit 10 receives a plurality of sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X are converted into serial data signals S_IN_DATAx and output toward the front frame LED connection board 500 of the door 6 via the relay board 550 . As a result, the number of wires in the harness as the transmission lines H10 and H9 can be effectively reduced. In particular, since the transmission line H9 is a harness that is separated when the side unit 10 is replaced, it is desirable in terms of configuration to reduce the number of wires and simplify the wiring.
Moreover, even if the side unit 10 is provided with a large number of sensors, switches, etc., the number of wires can be prevented from becoming enormous. Even if the side unit 10 is configured to perform the performance operation and various detection operations corresponding thereto, the number of wires can be prevented from becoming excessive.

Note that the decoration unit provided on the door 6 is not limited to the side unit 10, and includes units such as the production button 13, for example. That is, all the units provided on the door 6, replaceable with respect to the door 6, and performing decorations and presentation operations are the decoration units referred to herein.
For example, the production button 13 is configured as a decoration unit attached to the door 6. - 特許庁For the detection signals of the plurality of detection means in this effect button unit, for example, the button LED board 660 internally converts it into serial data, and directs it to the board outside the effect button unit (for example, the button LED connection board 640 and the front frame LED connection board 500). It is also possible to consider a configuration in which the

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A3-2) in addition to (configuration A3-1).
(Structure A3-2)
One or a plurality of second detection means are attached to a portion of the door 6 (door member) outside the decoration unit, and the second board receives the detection signal of the second detection means and the first board. The serial data signals from the inner frame 2 (frame member) are collectively converted into serial data signals and transmitted to the third substrate attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member).

In the case of this (configuration A3-2), the inner frame LED relay board 400 can be cited as an example corresponding to the third board.
Examples of the second detection means include detection means such as switches that generate the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14. That is, the cross key 15a decision button 15b, the operation detection switch such as the effect button 13, the rotation origin sensor in the effect button 13, the rotation effect light sensor in the effect button 13, the touch sensor provided in the firing operation handle 15, etc. detection means.

In the front frame LED connection board 500, the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 from these second detection means and the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are combined into a serial data signal. The S_IN_DATA is converted into S_IN_DATA and transmitted to the inner frame LED relay board 400 attached to the inner frame 2 .
By continuously serializing detection signals inside the door 6 with the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the front frame LED connection board 500, the number of wires for transmission from the door 6 to the inner frame 2 side can be reduced. .
In particular, in the harness (transmission line H8: see FIG. 5) that connects the wiring of the opening/closing portion of the door 6, a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wirings. As a result, the reliability of the wiring in the movable portion can be improved.

[6.2 Number of power supplies of transmission line H (Part 1)]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B1).
(Configuration B1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate receiving supply of a first power supply voltage, wherein the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. There are more than the number of lines in

In the case of this (configuration B1), the following corresponding example (specific example 1) is assumed with reference to FIG.
(Specific example 1)
- First substrate: power supply substrate 300
・Second board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Third board: front frame LED connection board 500
・First transmission line: transmission line H3
・Second transmission line: transmission line H8
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

In line with this example, FIG. 48 shows the transmission of the power supply voltage among the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500. As shown in FIG.

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400 through the transmission line H3. As shown, the transmission line H3 uses three lines to transmit a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) (see connector CN3A in FIG. 12 and connector CN4B in FIG. 14).
Although the transmission line H3 is composed of six lines, the remaining three lines are used as grounds.

As shown in FIG. 48, the inner frame LED relay board 400 supplies a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the front frame LED connection board 500 through the transmission line H8. As shown in the figure, the transmission line H8 transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) using four lines (see connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and connector CN2C in FIG. 15).

In addition, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, as described above, the 5V generation unit 410 (see FIG. 14) generates a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) using the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the front frame LED connection is performed by the transmission line H8. It supplies the substrate 500 . As shown in the figure, the transmission line H8 transmits a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) using two lines (see connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and connector CN2C in FIG. 15).
Further, five lines are used for the ground in the transmission line H8.

The front frame LED connection board 500 supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) further downstream.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are transmitted downstream through one line through the connector CN1C, and two lines are used as grounds. (See FIG. 16).
12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted through three lines to relay board 550 (and side unit upper right LED board 600) through transmission line H9 from connector CN3C, and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is transmitted through one line. is transmitted (see FIG. 17). Five lines are used for the ground.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted downstream through a single line through the connector CN4C (see FIG. 16).

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are transmitted to the button LED connection board 640 via the transmission line H15 through the connector CN10C, respectively (see FIG. 20). Five lines are used for the ground.
In the front frame LED connection board 500, as described above, the power separation/protection circuit 520 (see FIG. 15) separates the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the transmission line H15 connects the button LEDs. It feeds the substrate 640 .
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated by a power supply separation/protection circuit 521 (see FIG. 19) and used as the power supply voltage for the motor drivers 510 and 511 inside the board.

Focusing on the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) here, three lines are used in the transmission line H3 for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) between the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500. However, the transmission line H8 uses four lines. That is, it has a configuration corresponding to (configuration B1) described above.

Since the transmission line H8 on the downstream side uses a greater number of lines that use a 12 V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H3 on the upstream side, the configuration is advantageous when it is desired to downsize the connector on the downstream side. Become.

Specifically, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, connectors CN1B and CN4B are used for connection with the upstream side, and connectors CN2B and CN3B are used for connection with the downstream side. Examples of connectors CN1B, CN2B, and CN4B are shown in FIGS.
Each figure shows an example of a top type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from above while mounted on the substrate, but a side type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from the lateral direction may also be used.

The connector CN1B in FIG. 49 has, for example, the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 28
・Horizontal plane size S1: 30.0 mm
・ Planar vertical size S2: 8.3 mm
・Height size S3: 9.6mm
・Rated current: 3A
・Rated voltage: 250V
・Terminal pitch: 2mm
・Contact diameter: 0.7mm

The connector CN2B in FIG. 50 has, for example, the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 30
・Horizontal plane size S1: 26.2 mm
・ Planar vertical size S2: 7.4 mm
・Height size S3: 5.55mm
・Rated current: 2A
・Rated voltage: 100V
・Terminal pitch: 1.5mm
・Contact diameter: 0.65mm

The connector CN4B in FIG. 51 has, for example, the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 6
・Plane width size S1: 17.5 mm
・ Planar vertical size S2: 6.4 mm
・Height size S3: 8.8mm
・Rated current: 3A
・Rated voltage: 250V
・Terminal pitch: 2.5mm
・Contact diameter: 0.9mm

From the above, it can be seen that the connector CN2B on the downstream side is miniaturized.
The diameter of the contact is the diameter of the pin terminal in the case of a male connector, and the diameter of the corresponding pin terminal in the case of a female connector.

The connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 are used for exchange with the downstream side for various signals transmitted on the upstream side, the transmission line H7 and the connector CN1B, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied by the transmission line H3 and the connector CN4B. In this case, it is generally considered that the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 require the same rated current and rated voltage. It is assumed that the connector size is almost the same.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, 4 pins and 4 lines are applied to the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 especially for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). This reduces the current burden on one pin, making it possible to employ the connector CN2B that is small and has a small rated current as described above. By adopting a small connector, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is effective in increasing the layout margin on the board, improving the degree of freedom in design, or miniaturizing the board.

Further, as a result, the connector CN2C of the front frame LED connection board 500 can similarly be used with a small size and a small rated current, and the same effect can be obtained.

By the way, as a specific example corresponding to the above (structure B1), the following (specific example 2) is also conceivable.
(Specific example 2)
・First substrate: LED connection substrate 700
・Second board: board back bottom relay board 800
- Third substrate: decoration substrate 820
・First transmission line: transmission line H30
・Second transmission line: transmission line H31
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

As shown in FIG. 46, the connector CN1Q (and transmission line H30) of the relay board 800 under the board uses two lines for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), while the connector CN3Q (and transmission line H31) uses 6 lines for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
Since the transmission line H31 on the downstream side uses a greater number of lines that use a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H30 on the upstream side, the configuration is advantageous when it is desired to downsize the connector on the downstream side. Become.

52 and 53 show examples of connectors CN1Q and CN3Q of the board back lower relay board 800. FIG.
Each figure shows an example of a side type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from the side while mounted on the substrate, but a top type in which the end of the transmission line is inserted from above may also be used.

The connector CN1Q in FIG. 52 has, for example, the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 16
・Horizontal plane size S1: 10.2 mm
・ Planar vertical size S2: 5.1 mm
・Height size S3: 6.1mm
・Rated current: 1.0A
・Rated voltage: 50V
・Terminal pitch: 1mm

The connector CN3Q in FIG. 53 has, for example, the following specifications.
・Number of pins: 10
・Plane width size S1: 10.9mm
・ Planar vertical size S2: 4.5 mm
・Height size S3: 2.0mm
・Rated current: 0.5A
・Rated voltage: 50V
・Terminal pitch: 0.5mm

From the above, it can be seen that the connector CN3Q on the downstream side is downsized.
That is, the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31 use 6 pins and 6 lines for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), thereby reducing the current burden on one pin, and as described above, the compact connector CN3Q with a small rated current. It is possible to employ Employment of a small connector is effective in increasing the layout margin on the board, improving the degree of freedom in design, or reducing the size of the board in the backside lower relay board 800 .

In addition, as a result, the connector CN1S of the decoration board 820 can be similarly small and has a small rated current, and the same effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B2-1).
(Configuration B2-1)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, a first substrate attached to the inner frame 2, and attached to the inner frame 2. a second substrate connected to the first substrate through a first transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage; a third substrate that receives supply of a power supply voltage, wherein the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. There are more than a few.

In this case, examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 1) of the above (configuration B1). .

In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the third board, is arranged on the door 6, and the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, is arranged on the inner frame 2. Therefore, the transmission line which is the second transmission line H8 is a harness that connects the opening/closing portions of the door 6 as shown in FIG.
A connector CN2B and a connector CN2C for connecting both ends of the transmission line H8 are both of the specifications shown in FIG. As mentioned above, it is a relatively small connector.

Being able to reduce the size of the connectors CN2B and CN2C, which are both ends of the opening/closing portion of the door 6, is extremely effective in forming a space that does not interfere with the opening/closing operation.
It is desirable that the connectors CN2B and CN2C are exposed in the opening/closing space in order not to apply excessive force to the transmission line H8. If the size of the connectors CN2B and CN2C is large, not only the placement of the board on which the connectors CN2B and CN2C are placed but also the placement of peripheral components are likely to be restricted. easy to form. Since the connector connecting portion is an electrically fragile portion, it is desirable to avoid a structure that protrudes and is susceptible to external pressure. As a result, the degree of freedom in design is restricted unnecessarily.

In the present embodiment, the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is made larger than that of the transmission line H3, so that the size of the connectors CN2B and CN2C can be reduced for the reason explained in (Configuration B1) above. This makes it suitable for use as a connector for the opening/closing portion of the door 6, improving the degree of freedom in design and reducing the electrical vulnerability due to the reduction of protrusions.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B2-2) in addition to (configuration B2-1).
(Configuration B2-2)
The outer size of the connector used for the second transmission line is smaller than that of the connector used for the first transmission line.

That is, as described above for the sizes S1, S2, and S3, the housing size of the connector CN2B is made smaller than the housing size of the connector CN1B.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side employs a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous for downsizing the size of the substrate on the downstream side.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B3).
(Configuration B3)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first substrate, a second substrate connected to the first substrate by a first transmission line and receiving a first power supply voltage, and a substrate area larger than that of the first substrate and the second substrate. a third substrate which is small and connected to the second substrate via a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage, the third substrate being used for transmitting the first power supply voltage on the second transmission line. The number of lines is greater than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission lines.

Examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 1) of the above (configuration B1).

In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the third board, is smaller in size than the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, and the power supply board 300, which is the first board.
FIG. 8 shows the front frame LED connection board 500 , and FIG. 9 shows the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the power supply board 300 . Since FIGS. 8 and 9 are drawn on the same scale, as can be seen by comparison, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a larger board area (mounting surface on the board surface) than the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the power supply board 300. area) is small.
That is, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a relatively small space for arranging electronic components.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 of the inner frame LED relay board 400, the number of lines of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is made larger than the transmission line H3 on the upstream side, and the size of the connector CN2B is reduced. , and by extension, the miniaturization of the connector CN2C is made possible. This makes it possible to reduce the connector mounting area in the front frame LED connection board 500 and reduce the load on the board layout. Conversely, the front frame LED connection board 500 can be realized with a small board.

In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 is arranged on the door 6, and in order to reduce the weight of the door 6, it is desirable that the board and mounting parts be as light as possible. This point is also advantageous.
In addition, sensors, motors, effect button units, etc., tend to be densely located under the door 6, and it is desirable that the substrates and parts to be arranged be as small as possible. This configuration is also advantageous in this regard.
Of course, the fact that the connector CN2C can employ a small connector also makes it possible to keep the height size S3 of the board on which the components are mounted to be low.

Although the third substrate is smaller in substrate area than the first and second substrates, it may be smaller than the first and second substrates in terms of volume including the thickness of the substrate.
In addition, the third substrate may be smaller than the first and second substrates in terms of the spatial volume required for arrangement, including the height of the mounted electronic components.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B4).
(Configuration B4)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line and receiving a supply of a first power supply voltage, and a movable body arranged inside the movable body. a third substrate connected to the second substrate and receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage, wherein the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission lines is equal to the number of the transmission lines in the first transmission lines; The number of lines is greater than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage.

In this case, examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 2) of the above (configuration B1). be able to.

The decoration board 820, which is the third board, is mounted in a movable body (not shown) arranged in the lower front, and as shown in FIG. .
In addition, the transmission line H31 thus becomes a member that electrically connects the movable portions.

The connector CN3Q of the board backside lower relay board 800, which is the second board, uses a small connector as shown in FIG. Therefore, the connector CN1S of the decorative board 820 also becomes the connector shown in FIG.

That is, in the present embodiment, the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is made larger than that of the transmission line H3, so that the connectors CN3Q, CN1S can be miniaturized.
This makes the connector CN1S suitable for being mounted on the board in the movable body. This is because it is desirable that the decorative substrate 820 mounted on the movable body be small, and therefore the components to be mounted, particularly the connector that occupies a large area, should be small.
Therefore, according to (configuration B4), the decoration substrate 820 mounted on the movable body can be of an appropriate substrate size.
In addition, since the connector CN1S can be miniaturized, the mounting flexibility of the LED is increased, and it is also suitable for designing the light emitting position for presentation.

Also, although the connector CN1S is a tall component on the board, a relatively low connector can be used as the connector CN1S . In the case of a movable object, it is desirable to use a substrate with as little height as possible. This is due to circumstances such as the desire to prevent obstruction during movement and the desire to place it inside the movable object as much as possible. Therefore, it is effective to use a connector having a small height size S3. In this sense, a side-type connector as shown in FIG. 53 is more desirable than a top-type connector.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B5).
(Configuration B5)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate receiving supply of a first power supply voltage, wherein the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. and the second transmission line is formed of a flexible cable.

In this case, examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as (specific example 2) of the above (configuration B1). be able to.

A flexible cable refers to FFC (flexible flat cable) or FPC (flexible printed circuit board).
Particularly in this case, a flexible cable is used for the transmission line H31 that connects the backside lower relay board 800 as the second board and the decorative board 820 as the third board.
As can be seen from the assignment of the connector CN1S in FIG. 47, the flexible cable of the transmission line H31 transmits only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8 and 13-B8. there is
A flexible cable is also used for the transmission line H23 that connects the decoration board 740 and the relay board 760 attached to the movable accessory. As can be seen from the pin assignments of the connector CN4L in FIG. 43, the transmission line H23 transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a clock signal CLK_C, and a data signal DATA_C.

As described above, the transmission line H used in various places is not limited to a flexible cable, and may be, for example, a collection of a plurality of conductive wires. Especially here, it is assumed that the transmission line H31 is a flexible cable. .
Of course, since the decorative substrate 820 is arranged on a movable member and the transmission line H31 is moved within a predetermined stroke range, it is preferable to employ a flexible cable.

However, in the case of a flexible cable, the current that can flow through one line is small.
Therefore, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) received by two lines from the transmission line H30 through the connector CN1Q in the relay board 800 is transferred to the decoration board 820 using six lines in the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31. are supplying. As a result, even if a flexible cable is used, sufficient power can be supplied, and appropriate LED light emission can be realized in the decoration substrate 820 .
Also, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) received by two lines from the transmission line H22 through the connector CN1L in the decoration board 740 is supplied to the relay board 760 using three lines in the connector CN4L and the transmission line H23. there is Similarly, the 5 V DC voltage (DC 5 V) received through one line from the connector CN1L is supplied to the relay board 760 using three lines at the connector CN4L and the transmission line H23. As a result, even if a flexible cable is used, sufficient electric power is supplied to the relay board 760 and beyond.
As can be seen from FIGS. 43 and 44, the transmission line H23 transmits the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C through one line. In other words, when a flexible cable is used, the number of power supply lines is increased compared to a normal harness, but the clock and control data signals are supplied by a single line.

Note that this (structure B5) is also effective when a flexible cable is used for the transmission line H8. That is, it can also be applied as (specific example 1) of the above (configuration B1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B6-1).
(Configuration B6-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate receiving supply of a first power supply voltage, wherein the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. The second substrate generates a second power supply voltage using the first power supply voltage, and the third substrate generates the second power supply voltage by the second transmission line. It is also configured to receive the supply of

Examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage can be the same as (specific example 1) of the above (configuration B1). .
An example of the second power supply voltage can be a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).

In this case, the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, includes a 5V generator 410 (see FIG. 14) to generate a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
This 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied to the front frame LED connection board 500 from the connector CN2B in FIG. 13 through the transmission line H8.

As in (configuration B1) described above, for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), the transmission line H8 uses a larger number of lines than the transmission line H3, thereby miniaturizing the connectors CN2B and CN2C. In addition to realizing this, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is separately transmitted.

When the downstream board after the front frame LED connection board 500 provided on the door 6 uses not only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) but also the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), the inner frame LED relay board 400 located upstream thereof By generating and supplying a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), the wiring and circuit configuration for power supply can be made more efficient.
That is, transmission of 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400 can be eliminated, and furthermore, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated from 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for each board of the door 6. It is no longer necessary to adopt a configuration that

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B6-2) in addition to (configuration B6-1).
(Configuration B6-2)
A buffer circuit is mounted on the second substrate, and the second power supply voltage is used as a power supply voltage for the buffer circuit.

Buffer circuits 402 and 403 in FIG. 13 correspond to examples of the buffer circuits referred to here.
The buffer circuits 402 and 403 operate using the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the 5V generator 410 of the inner frame LED relay board 400 as a power supply voltage.

That is, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is provided with the 5V generator 410 to generate the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) because the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the downstream thereof generate the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). By using.
In other words, since the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is used downstream after the inner frame LED relay board 400, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated by the most upstream board within the use range of the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). do. A 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is transmitted to downstream substrates that use the power supply voltage.

For example, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400 is applied to the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, the side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit lower right LED board 620, and the button LED connection board 640. used in
It should be noted that in each figure, there are places labeled as "5V DC voltage (DC5V)", but as is clear from the circuit configuration, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is also the 5V DC voltage generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400. (DC5VB).
On the other hand, since the button LED board 660 does not use a 5V power source, it is not supplied with a 5V DC voltage (5V DC) (see FIG. 34).

As a result, the wiring and circuit configuration for supplying the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) can be made more efficient.
That is, from upstream to downstream, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is spread over the range of substrates using the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). Therefore, it is not necessary to generate or relay the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) in the unused substrate upstream of the inner frame LED relay substrate 400 . Of course, it is not necessary to adopt a configuration for generating a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for each board of the door 6.

[6.3 Connector structure]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C1).
(Configuration C1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first substrate, a second substrate connected to the first substrate via a first transmission line, and a third substrate connected to the second substrate via a second transmission line, A first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board and a second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board are different types of connectors.

In the case of this (configuration C1), the following corresponding example (specific example 3) is assumed.
(Specific example 3)
・First board: frame LED relay board 840
・Second board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Third board: front frame LED connection board 500
・First transmission line: transmission line H7
・Second transmission line: transmission line H8
・First connector: connector CN1B
・Second connector: connector CN2B

The connectors CN1B and CN2B in this case are shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and their specifications are also as described above, and different types are used. In particular, the connector CN2B connecting the downstream side is made smaller than the connector CN1B connecting the upstream side.
That is, in the frame LED relay board 840 , the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500, which are electrically connected from upstream to downstream, the inner frame LED relay board 400 has the connector CN1B on the upstream side and the connector CN1B on the downstream side. Since the types of CN2B are different, it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, which is advantageous for arranging components such as substrates on the downstream side.

In particular, on the downstream side, it is desirable to place substrates for controlling and relaying the most downstream devices, such as motors, sensors, and LED substrates, at positions close to them. Of course, it is often close to movable objects. Then, it is desirable that the substrate area be as small as possible. Therefore, being able to reduce the substrate size on the downstream side leads to an increase in the degree of freedom in design. Moreover, it is possible to realize a substrate suitable for the case of using a complicated rendering device structure.

A specific example corresponding to (configuration C1) is not limited to the above (specific example 3). For example, the following board (and connector) can be exemplified as a second board having different types of first connector and second connector.

・Front frame LED connection board 500 (upstream side connector CN2C and other downstream side connectors)
・Relay board 550 (connector CN1D on the upstream side and connector CN2D on the downstream side)
・Side unit upper right LED board 600 (upstream side connector CN1E and other downstream side connectors)
・Side unit lower right LED board 620 (upstream side connector CN3F and other downstream side connectors)
- Button LED connection board 640 (connector CN1G on the upstream side and other connectors on the downstream side)
・LED connection board 700 (connector CN1J on the upstream side and other connectors on the downstream side)
・Decoration board 740 (connector CN1L on the upstream side and other connectors on the downstream side)
・Relay board 760 (connector CN1M on the upstream side and other connectors on the downstream side)
・LED board 780 (connector CN1N on the upstream side and connector CN2N on the downstream side)
・Back board bottom relay board 800 (upstream side connector CN1Q and other downstream side connectors)

When one of them is considered as the second substrate, the upstream thereof can be considered as the first substrate, and the downstream thereof as the third substrate.
In each of these examples as well, by using a small connector on the downstream side, it is possible to make it advantageous for the arrangement of components such as substrates on the downstream side.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C2).
(Configuration C2)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first substrate, a second substrate connected to the first substrate via a first transmission line, and a third substrate connected to the second substrate via a second transmission line, A second connector for connecting the second transmission line on the second substrate has more pins than a first connector for connecting the first transmission line on the second substrate.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as (Specific Example 3) of (Configuration C1) above. be able to.

The connector CN1B has 28 pins and the connector CN2B has 30 pins (see FIG. 13). Their specifications are also as described above.
In this case, the main reasons for the increase in the number of pins on the downstream side are the increase in the number of pins assigned to 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the start of transmission of 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) as described above. It is the cause.
Increasing the number of pins reduces the current load per pin, which allows the connector CN2B to be smaller than the connector CN1B. For example, one with a low rated current can be adopted.
Therefore, it is advantageous to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (structure C1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C3).
(Configuration C3)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first substrate, a second substrate connected to the first substrate via a first transmission line, and a third substrate connected to the second substrate via a second transmission line, A second connector connecting the second transmission line on the second substrate has a smaller rated current than a first connector connecting the first transmission line on the second substrate.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as (Specific Example 3) of (Configuration C1) above. be able to.

As described above, the rated current of the connector CN1B is 3A, and the rated current of the connector CN2B is 2A.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side employs a compact one with a small rated current. Therefore, it is advantageous to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (structure C1) can be obtained.
In order to use a connector with a small rated current, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted through a greater number of lines as described above.

A specific example corresponding to (configuration C3) is not limited to the above (specific example 3), and various examples are assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C4-1).
(Configuration C4-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first substrate, a second substrate connected to the first substrate via a first transmission line, and a third substrate connected to the second substrate via a second transmission line, A second connector for connecting the second transmission line on the second substrate has a narrower terminal pitch than a first connector for connecting the first transmission line on the second substrate.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as (Specific Example 3) of (Configuration C1) above. be able to.

As described above, the terminal pitch of the connector CN1B is 2 mm, and the terminal pitch of the connector CN2B is 1.5 mm.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side employs a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (structure C1) can be obtained.
In order to use a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted through a greater number of lines as described above.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C4-2) in addition to (configuration C4-1).
(Configuration C4-2)
A second connector connecting the second transmission line on the second substrate has a smaller contact diameter than a first connector connecting the first transmission line on the second substrate.

As described above, the connector CN1B has a contact diameter of 0.7 mm, and the connector CN2B has a contact diameter of 0.65 mm.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side employs a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch and a small contact diameter. Therefore, it is advantageous to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

It should be noted that specific examples corresponding to (configuration C4-1) and (configuration C4-2) are not limited to the above (specific example 3), and various examples can be assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C5).
(Configuration C5)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first substrate, a second substrate connected to the first substrate via a first transmission line, and a third substrate connected to the second substrate via a second transmission line, A second connector for connecting the second transmission line on the second substrate has a smaller housing size than a first connector for connecting the first transmission line on the second substrate.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as (Specific Example 3) of (Configuration C1) above. be able to.

As described above for sizes S1, S2, and S3, the housing size of connector CN2B is smaller than the housing size of connector CN1B.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side employs a small connector with a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

A specific example corresponding to (configuration C5) is not limited to the above (specific example 3), and various examples are assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

[6.4 Wiring route]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D1-1).
(Configuration D1-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the effect means, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line. and a third substrate receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, wherein the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is greater than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. is shorter, and the area of the substrate surface of the third substrate is made smaller than that of the second substrate.

In the case of this (configuration D1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 4) is assumed.
(Specific example 4)
- First substrate: Relay substrate 550
・Second board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Third board: LED board 630 on the side unit
・First transmission line: transmission line H10
・Second transmission line: transmission line H12

FIG. 54 shows wiring paths among the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, the side unit upper right LED board 600, and the side unit upper LED board 630. As shown in FIG. 54 shows the wiring paths of the transmission lines H9, H10, and H12 in the circuit board arrangement explained in FIG. It is.

A harness as a transmission line H9 connected to the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 arranged at the lower left of the door 6 is directed upward along the left side of the door 6 and directed right near the upper end. It is a path that reaches the connector CN1D of the relay board 550 .
The harness as the transmission line H10 connected to the connector CN2D of the relay board 550 is a path extending from the upper end of the door 6 along the upper right corner to reach the connector CN1E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit attached to the side unit 10. be.
The harness as the transmission line H12 connected to the connector CN2E of the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit goes back along the path of the transmission line H10 and reaches the connector CN1T of the upper LED board 630 of the side unit.

Here, in FIG. 54, attention is paid to the relay board 550 as the first board, the side unit upper right LED board 600 as the second board, and the side unit upper LED board 630 as the third board.
First, the relay board 550 and the side unit upper LED board 630 have a positional relationship such that they overlap in the front-rear direction (the side unit upper LED board 630 is on the front side (player side)).
The relay board 550 and the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are separated from each other near the upper end and near the right end of the door 6 .
Clearly, the distance between the relay board 550 and the side unit upper LED board 630 is shorter than the distance between the relay board 550 and the side unit upper right LED board 600 .

As is clear from this figure, the side unit upper LED board 630 as the third board has a smaller board surface area than the side unit upper right LED board 600 as the second board.

In other words, considering the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit upper LED board 630, the side unit upper LED board 630 is downstream, but the board area is made smaller on the downstream side.
There is a demand for a smaller substrate area as the substrate is placed on the downstream side. There is a circumstance that the layout position of the board is likely to be closer to the motor, sensor, movable body parts, etc., on the downstream side. This is because a substrate with a large area tends to cause disadvantages and inconveniences. For example, depending on the layout of the board, there may be restrictions on the movement of movable objects and restrictions on decorations.
In the above (configuration D1-1), the area of the side unit upper LED board 630 is made smaller than the side unit upper right LED board 600, so that the configuration is adapted to the situation of the downstream side board. This improves the degree of freedom in layout design and design.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D1-2) in addition to the above (configuration D1-1).
(Configuration D1-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first wiring.

As shown in FIG. 54, the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board, is positioned on the path of the transmission line H10, which is the first wiring. Therefore, the route of the transmission line H12 is set so as to return to the route of the transmission line H10.
Such wiring route setting is very effective for miniaturization of the LED board 630 on the side unit.

The side unit upper right LED board 600 to which signals are transmitted from the relay board 550 is the most upstream of the boards in the side unit 10 . For example, the side unit upper LED board 630 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 exist downstream.
Further, on the side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit upper right movable object motor 104 connected to the connector CN4E, the side unit upper right movable object solenoid 105 connected to the connector CN5E, the blower 106 connected to the connector CN6E, the connector There are sensors in the side unit device 101 connected to CN7E, and so on.

In other words, considering the substrate that serves as a base point for each part in the side unit, the circuit configuration becomes complicated, and the substrate area inevitably increases. The number of lines for wiring also increases, and the size and number of connectors CN tend to increase.
Therefore, the role of the base board in the side unit 10 is assigned to the board at the upper right corner of the frame, which can relatively secure an area. That is, it is the side unit upper right LED board 600 . Assuming a substantially circular game surface, it is easy to place a board having a large area on the corners of the frame. The upper right corner is also substantially the center of the side unit 10 .

After that, signal transmission is performed to each part in the side unit 10 . In this case, there is a member arranged at a position on the wiring route of the transmission line H10, which is the first wiring. That is, it is the side unit upper LED board 630 which is the third board.
With such a configuration, first, the total wiring length to each part in the side unit 10 can be shortened. Each unit includes the side unit upper LED board 630, the side unit lower right LED board 620, the side unit upper right movable object motor 104, the side unit upper right movable object solenoid 105, the blower 106, the side unit device 101, and the like.

Since wiring to each of these parts is performed from the side unit upper right LED board 600 located substantially in the center of the side unit 10, the wiring can be performed with a short wire length in the arrangement direction of each part.
It is assumed that the side unit LED board 630 close to the relay board 550 is set as a base point. From the positional relationship with the relay board 550, this seems to be desirable at first glance. However, when the side unit LED board 630 close to the relay board 550 is used as a base point for wiring to each part, the wiring is formed in parallel from the side unit LED board 630 to each part. In this case, for example, many wirings are overlapped around the upper right corner of the door 6, and as a result, the total wiring length becomes long. In addition, as the number of wires to be wired increases, it becomes difficult to store the wires.
Using the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit as a base point, as a result, a state in which the forward/return paths overlap like the transmission line H12 is generated, so that the total wiring length can be shortened, and the concentration of the wiring wire can be reduced. will be alleviated.

In addition, miniaturization of the side unit upper LED substrate 630 can be promoted. The side unit upper LED board 630 is the most downstream board and only needs to receive signals and power supply voltage necessary for its own operation through the connector CN1T, and a small connector can be used. In addition, other connectors are unnecessary and the circuit configuration is simple. For example, in the case of the example of FIG. 32, the LED driver 631 and the light emitting unit 632 may be mounted, resulting in a simple configuration.
For these reasons, it is possible to promote miniaturization of the side unit LED board 630, thereby making it suitable as a downstream board and promoting the above-described effects such as the degree of freedom in design.

In other words, the fact that the third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first wiring in (configuration D1-2) means that the second substrate becomes the base point of wiring to the member including the third substrate. This means that wiring can be made more efficient and the size of the third substrate can be reduced rather than simply wiring in order of proximity.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-1).
(Configuration D2-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the effect means, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line. and a third substrate receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, wherein the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is greater than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. is shorter, and the number of electric parts mounted on the third board is smaller than that on the second board.

As an example corresponding to this case as well, the above (specific example 4) is assumed.
Note that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) is greater than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper right LED board 600 (second board). is shorter, as described above.

The electric parts whose numbers are compared may be all electric parts. For example, electric parts such as IC chips, resistors, capacitors, LEDs, and connectors.

Alternatively, the electrical component may be considered as an electrical component (excluding passive elements) that receives power supply voltage and consumes power. Specifically, the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit includes LED drivers 605 and 606, motor drivers 608 and 609, buffer circuits 604 and 607, LEDs of the light emitting section 612, and the like (see FIGS. 27 and 28). The LED board 630 on the side unit includes an LED driver 631, an LED of a light emitting section 632, and the like (see FIG. 32).

Further alternatively, the electrical component may be an LED as an electrical component that directly performs a performance operation (an electrical component that receives performance operation control).
Therefore, the side unit upper right LED board 600 becomes the LED of the light emitting portion 612 (see FIG. 27), and the side unit upper LED board 630 becomes the LED of 632 (see FIG. 32).

In any case, the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) has fewer electrical components than the side unit upper right LED board 600 (second board).
As a result, the board area of the side unit upper LED board 630 can be reduced. Therefore, the effect described in (structure D1-1) of downsizing of the substrate on the downstream side and improvement in design and degree of freedom thereby can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-2) in addition to the above (configuration D2-1).
(Configuration D2-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. Thereby, the effect described above (structure D1-2) is obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-3) in addition to the above (configuration D2-1).
(Configuration D2-3)
The third substrate has a substrate surface area smaller than that of the second substrate. Thereby, the effect described in the above (structure D1-1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D3-1).
(Configuration D3-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the effect means, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line. and a third substrate receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, wherein the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is greater than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. is shorter than that of the second substrate, and the power consumption of the circuit mounted on the third substrate is smaller than that of the second substrate.

As an example corresponding to this case as well, the above (specific example 4) is assumed.
Note that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) is greater than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper right LED board 600 (second board). is shorter, as described above.

As described above, the side unit upper right LED board 600 has more components than the side unit upper LED board 630 and consumes more current than the side unit upper LED board 630 .
Comparing the circuit configurations, it is clear that the side unit upper right LED board 600 consumes more current due to the difference in the number of LEDs between the light emitting section 612 and the light emitting section 632 and the difference in the number of mounted LED drivers. .
In other words, the side unit upper LED board 630 adopts a circuit configuration that reduces power consumption. As a result, the board area of the side unit upper LED board 630 can be reduced. Therefore, the effect described in (structure D1-1) of downsizing of the substrate on the downstream side and improvement in design and degree of freedom thereby can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D3-2) in addition to the above (configuration D3-1).
(Configuration D3-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. Thereby, the effect described above (structure D1-2) is obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D4-1).
(Configuration D4-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a signal for driving control of the effect means, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line. and a third substrate receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, wherein the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is greater than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. is shorter, a signal for motor drive control is included in the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted through the first transmission line, and a signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted through the second transmission line is included. The signals for motor drive control are not included in the signals for

As an example corresponding to this case as well, the above (specific example 4) is assumed.
Note that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper LED board 630 (third board) is greater than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the side unit upper right LED board 600 (second board). is shorter, as described above.

Signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted by the transmission line H10 and received by the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, which is the second board, are, for example, the enable signal ENABLE_L, the clock signal CLK_P, and the reset signal RESET_P shown in FIG. is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 605 (FIG. 27), or to control the LED driver 606 and the motor drivers 608, 609 (FIG. 28), as detailed in FIGS. do. That is, it includes signals for LED light emission and motor drive control.

Signals for driving control of the rendering means transmitted through the transmission line H12 and received by the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, include, for example, the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET shown in FIG. is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 631 .

That is, the signal for driving control of the effect means transmitted through the transmission line H10 includes the signal for motor drive control, and the signal for driving control of the effect means transmitted through the transmission line H12 includes Motor drive control signals are not included.
This is because the side unit upper right LED board 600 (or the downstream board other than the side unit upper LED board 630), which is the second board, has a motor driver, while the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board, has a motor driver. It means you don't have the driver.
A relatively large current is used to drive the motor. In addition, a large number of lines are required depending on the circumstances of motor drive such as three-phase drive and four-phase drive. For this reason, it is difficult to miniaturize a substrate having a motor driver.
Conversely, the side unit upper LED board 630 is not a board on which a motor driver is mounted, thereby promoting miniaturization and facilitating miniaturization as the most downstream board. Further, due to the miniaturization, the effect described in the above (configuration D1-1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D4-2) in addition to the above (configuration D4-1).
(Configuration D4-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. Thereby, the effect described above (structure D1-2) is obtained.

[6.5 Number of power supplies of transmission line H (part 2)]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E1).
(Configuration E1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate receiving supply of a first power supply voltage, the third substrate having a substrate surface area smaller than that of the second substrate, and a line used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line. is less than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

In the case of this (configuration E1), a corresponding example (specific example 5) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 5)
- First substrate: Relay substrate 550
・Second board: Side unit upper right LED board 600
・Third board: LED board 630 on the side unit
・First transmission line: transmission line H10
・Second transmission line: transmission line H12
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

Here, the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board, has a smaller board surface area than the side unit upper right LED board 600, which is the second board. FIG. 8 shows the side unit upper LED board 630 and the side unit upper right LED board 600, and the size of the area of such board surfaces is clear from the drawing.

As can be seen from the assignment of the connector CN1E in FIG. 24, the transmission line H10 uses two lines for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
On the other hand, as can be seen from the assignments of the connector CN2E in FIG. 26 and the connector CN1T in FIG. 32, the transmission line H12 uses one line for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

In other words, in the side unit upper right LED board 600, the number of lines for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in transmission to the side unit upper LED board 630 is reduced. As a result, the connector CN1T having a small number of terminals can be used on the LED board 630 side on the side unit.

The mounting area of each substrate is often limited by the arrangement of surrounding components. For example, in the present embodiment, the area of the LED board 630 on the side unit is reduced due to the layout of the surrounding components. That is, it is made easy to secure an arrangement area for the LEDs, the LED driver 631, and the like.
In this way, (structure E1) is effective when the substrate area on the downstream side is desired to be reduced or must be reduced.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E2-1).
(Configuration E2-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate for receiving a supply of a first power supply voltage, the third substrate having a smaller number of electrical components than the second substrate, and transmitting the first power supply voltage on the second transmission line. The number of lines used is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission lines.

The above (specific example 5) is assumed as an example corresponding to this case as well.
The electric parts may be considered to be all electric parts, but more preferably all or main electric parts that consume power based on the power supply voltage of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system, which is the first power supply voltage. do.
Specifically, the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit includes LED drivers 605 and 606, motor drivers 608 and 609, LEDs of the light emitting section 612, and the like (see FIGS. 27 and 28).
Further, the LED board 630 on the side unit includes an LED driver 631, an LED of a light emitting portion 632, and the like (see FIG. 32).

In addition, the LED may be considered as the main electrical component that consumes power based on the 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) system power supply voltage. Comparing the number of LEDs in the light emitting portion 612 and the light emitting portion 632, the number of LEDs in the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit is obviously larger.

In other words, the side unit upper right LED board 600 itself consumes most of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system, while also supplying the downstream side unit upper LED board 630 . In this case, the power consumption is relatively small on the side unit LED substrate 630 side.

With such a configuration, even if the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H12 is less than the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H10, there is a problem. There will be no In other words, since the amount of current to be transmitted is also reduced, the configuration does not cause problems due to transmission through one line.
Therefore, the number of lines is reduced, the size of the connector on the substrate on the downstream side is reduced, and the configuration is advantageous for mounting on a substrate having a relatively small substrate area.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E2-2) in addition to the above (configuration E2-1).
(Configuration E2-2)
The third substrate has a substrate surface area smaller than that of the second substrate.

As described above, the area of the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board on the downstream side, is relatively small. In this case, miniaturization of the connector CN1T is very useful in terms of design.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E3).
(Configuration E3)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate that receives supply of a first power supply voltage, wherein the third substrate consumes less power in a mounted circuit than the second substrate, and is used to transmit the first power supply voltage through the second transmission line. The number of lines is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission lines.

The above (specific example 5) is assumed as an example corresponding to this case as well.
As described above, the side unit upper right LED board 600 has more components than the side unit upper LED board 630 and consumes more current than the side unit upper LED board 630 .
Comparing the circuit configurations, it is clear that the side unit upper right LED board 600 consumes more current due to the difference in the number of LEDs between the light emitting section 612 and the light emitting section 632 and the difference in the number of mounted LED drivers. .

With such a configuration, even if the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H12 is less than the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H10, there is a problem. There will be no In other words, since the amount of current to be transmitted is also reduced, the configuration does not cause problems due to transmission through one line.
Therefore, the number of lines is reduced, the size of the connector on the substrate on the downstream side is reduced, and the configuration is advantageous for mounting on a substrate having a relatively small substrate area.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E4).
(Configuration E4)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board through a first transmission line to receive a first power supply voltage, and a second board connected to the second board through a second transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage. a third substrate that receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, a signal for motor drive control included in a signal for driving control of the effect means transmitted through the first transmission line, and the second transmission; A signal for motor drive control is not included in the signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted through the lines, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission lines is less than the number of the first power supply voltages. The number of lines is less than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in one transmission line.

The above (specific example 5) is assumed as an example corresponding to this case as well.
Signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted by the transmission line H10 and received by the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, which is the second board, are, for example, the enable signal ENABLE_L, the clock signal CLK_P, and the reset signal RESET_P shown in FIG. is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 605 (FIG. 27), or to control the LED driver 606 and the motor drivers 608, 609 (FIG. 28), as detailed in FIGS. do. That is, it includes signals for LED light emission and motor drive control.

Signals for driving control of the rendering means transmitted through the transmission line H12 and received by the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, include, for example, the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET shown in FIG. is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 631 .

That is, the signal for driving control of the effect means transmitted through the transmission line H10 includes the signal for motor drive control, and the signal for driving control of the effect means transmitted through the transmission line H12 includes Motor drive control signals are not included.

This is because the side unit upper right LED board 600 (or the downstream board other than the side unit upper LED board 630), which is the second board, has a motor driver, while the side unit upper LED board 630, which is the third board, has a motor driver. It means you don't have the driver.
A relatively large current is used to drive the motor. In addition, a large number of lines are required depending on the circumstances of motor drive such as three-phase drive and four-phase drive. If the LED board 630 on the side unit is mounted with a motor driver or is a board that relays individual motors, a large number of lines are required for transmission of 12 V DC voltage (DC12 VB) in the transmission line H12. become.
In this example, no motor drive control signal is transmitted to the LED board 630 on the side unit. In other words, the side unit upper LED board 630 is not provided with a motor driving function. This realizes simplification of the circuit and miniaturization of the connector in the side unit upper LED board 630, and promotes miniaturization of the side unit upper LED board 630 arranged at the most downstream and relatively forward.

[6.6 Power supply path]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F1).
(Configuration F1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, and a game board 3 ( replacement member), the effect control board 30 attached to the game board 3, and the power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, and the signal for driving control of the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is The power supply voltage for driving the performance means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is supplied from the power supply board 300 without going through the game board 3, which is output from the performance control board 30.

In the case of this (configuration F1), the following specific example is assumed.
Rendering means: LEDs, motors, blowers, etc. provided on the door 6 . If the inner frame 2 is provided with an LED or the like, it is also included.
- Signals for drive control of effect means: clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M input to the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
- Power supply voltage for driving the production means: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

Incidentally, as described above, actually, in order to operate the various effect means on the door 6, not only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) but also the 12V DC voltage (DC12V), the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB, DC5V), and the 12V Motor drive voltages (MOT12V, MOT12VA) are used, but these are all voltages based on the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400 . Therefore, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) including these becomes the power supply voltage for driving the performance means.

As described above, the clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M from the effect control board 30, the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, the data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, the enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M are each board of the door 6 downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400 , and the operation of each LED and motor is executed accordingly.
In addition, the 12V DC voltage (DC12V) from the power supply board 300 and the voltage based on it are supplied to each board of the downstream door 6 starting from the inner frame LED relay board 400, and are used as the power supply voltage for the operation of each LED and motor. be.
That is, the effect means of the door 6 is configured to operate using the power supply voltage supplied through the transmission line H3 according to the drive signal supplied from the effect control board 30 through the transmission lines H6 and H7 shown in FIG. ing.

Such a configuration makes it unnecessary to supply the power supply voltage from the power supply board 300 to the side of the door 6 via the performance control board 30, and makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the power supply wiring.
In particular, the drive signal and the power supply voltage are collectively sent to the front frame LED connection board 500 of the door 6 via the inner frame LED relay board 400 arranged on the inner frame 2 like the power board 300, thereby improving the wiring efficiency. ing. As for the power supply wiring to the door 6, it also means that the wasteful wraparound to the game board 3 can be eliminated.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F2).
(Configuration F2)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, and a game board 3 ( replacement member), the effect control board 30 attached to the game board 3, and the power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, and the signal for driving control of the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is The power supply voltage for driving the performance means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6, which is output from the performance control board 30, is supplied from the power supply board 300 without passing through the game board 3, and the performance means provided on the game board 3. A signal for driving control is output from the effect control board 30, and a power supply voltage for driving the effect means provided on the game board 3 is supplied from the effect control board 30.

In the case of this (structure F2), the corresponding specific example is the same as that of F1 above, but the effect means include the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 and the effect means provided on the game board 3 .
The effect means provided on the game board 3 are LEDs, motors, and the like driven by each board in the game board 3 of FIG.
The power supply voltage for driving the effect means provided on the game board 3 is a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and a 35V DC voltage (DC35V) supplied to the connector CN1J in FIG. .

In this case, the same effect as the above (structure F1) can be obtained with respect to the wiring for the effect means of the door 6.
In addition, the efficiency of wiring to the effect means of the game board 3 is realized. That is, since the effect control board 30 is provided on the game board 3, the power supply voltage and the signal for drive control are collectively sent to the LED connection board 700 by the transmission line H20 in the effect control board 30, so that extra Power wiring can be eliminated. As a result, wiring in the game board 3 can be efficiently performed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F3).
(Configuration F3)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the inner frame 2, and a game board 3 ( a replacement member), an effect control board 30 attached to the game board 3, a power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, a first board attached to the inner frame 2, and a second board attached to the door 6. The first board receives a signal for driving control of the production means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 from the production control board 30, and supplies the power supply voltage for driving the production means to the power supply board 300. , without going through the game board 3, and a signal for driving control of the effect means and a power supply voltage for driving the effect means are input through one connector arranged on the first substrate. It is designed to output to two boards.

In the case of this (configuration F3), the corresponding concrete example is as follows.
Rendering means: LEDs, motors, blowers, etc. provided on the door 6 . If the inner frame 2 is provided with an LED or the like, it is also included.
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: front frame LED connection board 500
- Signals for drive control of effect means: clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M input to the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
- Power supply voltage for driving the production means: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
• Connector: connector CN2B in FIG.

As a result, in addition to obtaining the same effect as the above (structure F1) regarding the wiring for the effect means of the door 6, the wiring downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400 can be made efficient. That is, the signal wiring from the effect control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) and the power wiring from the power board 300 are collected by the connector CN2B and connected to the downstream front frame LED connection board 500 by the transmission line H8. . This eliminates the need to use a plurality of connectors for the front frame LED connection board 500 . Also, since this transmission line H8 is the wiring for the opening/closing portion between the inner frame 2 and the door 6, it is preferable to combine the wiring with a pair of connectors (CN2B, CN2C) so that the wiring is less likely to be disturbed during opening/closing.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the inner frame LED relay board 400 uses two connectors CN1B and CN4B to connect to the upstream side.
The connector CN1B is used for wiring with the game board 3, and the connector CN4B is used for wiring within the inner frame 2. FIG. Therefore, it is preferable to use another connector. In this case, the wiring efficiency is improved in the sense that the signals are collectively transmitted to the front frame LED connection board 500 on the downstream side through one connector CN2B.

[6.7 Separation of Power Supply Voltage System]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-1).
(Configuration G1-1)
The game machine 1 has a board provided with a first circuit for performing a light emitting effect and a second circuit for performing a movable body effect. A first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage to the first circuit as a first power supply voltage, and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to a performance motor driven by the second circuit. and are formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G1-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 6) is assumed.
(Specific example 6)
・Board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・First circuit: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, and a circuit made up of electric parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., which are provided together with these for light emission effects (see FIGS. 27 and 56)
・Second circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and a circuit made up of electric parts such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., and conductor patterns (see FIGS. 28 and 56) provided together with these for the production of movable bodies.
・Production motor: side unit lower right movable object motor 103, side unit upper right movable object motor 104, etc. (see FIGS. 28 and 55)
・First power supply line: power supply line PLa (see FIG. 56)
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLc (see FIG. 56)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: power supply isolation/protection circuit 670 (see FIGS. 29 and 55)

Here, in order to explain the configuration, a power supply system between the side unit upper right LED board 600 and its upstream and downstream boards will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 .
FIG. 55 shows, in the same manner as in FIG. 48, the relay board 550, the upper right side unit LED board 600, the lower right side unit LED board 620, the upper side unit LED board 630, and the power source between the most downstream motor and the like. It shows the transmission of voltage.

The connector CN1D of the relay board 550 is connected to the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 of FIG. 48 via the transmission line H9.
In this case, from the front frame LED connection board 500, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied through one line, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied through three lines. Five lines are used for the ground.

As shown in FIG. 55, from the relay board 550, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied through one line to the side unit upper right LED board 600 via the transmission line H10, and a 12V DC voltage is supplied through two lines. (DC12VB) is supplied. Four lines are used for the ground (see connector CN2D in FIG. 23 and connector CN1E in FIG. 24).

The side unit upper right LED board 600 supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) further downstream.
The transmission line H12 from the connector CN2E transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the LED board 630 on the side unit downstream through one line. In this transmission line H12, two lines are used for the ground (see FIG. 26).

12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) are transmitted to the side unit lower right LED board 620 via the transmission line H11 from the connector CN3E. ing. Here, two lines are used for the ground (see FIG. 26).
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN7E to the sensor 101S of the side unit device 101 through one line. Here, one line is used for the ground (see FIG. 25).

Here, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) at the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit. As described above, the power separation/protection circuit 670 (see FIG. 29) separates the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and supplies it to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit through the transmission line H11. ing.
The separated motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from connector CN4E to side unit upper right movable object motor 104, from connector CN5E to side unit upper right movable object solenoid 105, and from connector CN6E to blower 106 ( See FIG. 28 for the above).

In the side unit upper right LED board 600, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated by the power separation/protection circuit 671 (see FIG. 29) and used as the power supply voltage for the motor drivers 608 and 609 inside the board.

The side unit lower right LED board 620 supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to downstream devices, respectively.
That is, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the lower right movable object position detection switch 102 of the side unit through one line from the connector CN4F. Here, one line is used as the ground. Also, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted to the side unit lower right movable object motor 103 through two lines from the connector CN1F. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the LED substrate 625 through one line from the connector CN2F (refer to FIG. 30).

FIG. 56 shows a power supply system that is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the side unit upper right LED board 600 .
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input to the connector CN1E is directly formed through the power supply line PLa and supplied to the LED drivers 605 and 606, the light emitting section 612, and the connectors CN2E, CN3E and CN7E.

56 (see FIG. 29) separates the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to form power supply line PLc. As a result, while the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a reference voltage in the motor drivers 608 and 609, as shown in FIG. 106 to downstream devices.

Power supply separation/protection circuit 671 (see FIG. 29) in FIG. 56 separates the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) to form power supply line PLb. As a result, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor drivers 608 and 609 as an operating voltage.

It can be understood from FIG. 56 that the specific example 6 corresponds to the configuration G1.

In addition, the above (configuration G1-1) can also be assumed to correspond to the following example (specific example 7).
(Specific example 7)
・Board: front frame LED connection board 500
・First circuit: A circuit of electric parts such as wiring, resistors, capacitors, etc., related to signals for light emission, provided for light emission by LED boards downstream of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, CN10C ・Second Circuits: Motor drivers 510, 511, and circuits and performance motors made up of electric parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. provided for rendering movable bodies: Connector CN10, transmission line H15, button LED connection board Motor/first power supply line (not shown) connected via connectors CN1G and CN3G (FIG. 33) of 640: power supply line PLp (see FIG. 57)
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLr (see FIG. 57)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power separation/protection circuit 520

Power supply voltage transmission between the front frame LED connection board 500, the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400, and the downstream relay board 550 and button LED connection board 640 is as shown in FIGS. .
FIG. 57 shows the power supply system separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the front frame LED connection board 500 .
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input to the connector CN2C forms the power supply line PLp as it is, and is supplied to the LED driver 509 and the connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C.

57 (see FIG. 15) separates the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to form power supply line PLr. As a result, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a reference voltage in the motor drivers 510 and 511, and supplied from the connector CN10C to the button LED connection board 640 through the transmission line H15 (see FIG. 48). This motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is supplied from the connector CN4G of the button LED connection board 640 to the motor of the vibration device (see FIG. 33).

57 (see FIG. 19) separates the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) to form power supply line PLq. As a result, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor drivers 510 and 511 as an operating voltage.

From FIG. 57, it can be understood that the seventh specific example corresponds to the configuration G1.

That is, such (structure G1-1) obtains the effect of stabilizing the power supply voltage of the LED system by separating the LED power supply system and the motor power supply system through the protection circuit. That is, it is made difficult to mix power supply noise due to motor driving, and to prevent the influence of voltage fluctuation due to motor driving.
LEDs are driven to emit light very often, but motors are driven occasionally with high current consumption. It is possible to prevent light emission from becoming unstable due to the influence of the motor power supply voltage system.

Further, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of Specific Example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 7 separate the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). . In other words, it is not a power supply system that is branched into two systems on the substrate on the upstream side. Therefore, the number of power supply systems between the substrates on the upstream side can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and the number of connector pins can be reduced in design.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-2) in addition to the above (configuration G1-1).
(Configuration G1-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage are output to the outside of the substrate.

In the case of this (structure G1-2) as well, the above specific examples 6 and 7 can be mentioned.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit of Specific Example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 7 use 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and motor drive voltage (MOT12V). Output from the connector CN to downstream substrates and devices.
Therefore, it is possible to use different power sources for the downstream motor and the LED substrate.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-3) in addition to the above (configuration G1-1) or (configuration G1-2).
(Configuration G1-3)
The protection circuit is a protection circuit using a diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line to the first power supply line.

Specific examples 6 and 7 of the above include power supply isolation/protection circuits 670 and 520 corresponding to protection circuits. ing.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting operation from becoming unstable due to the reverse current from the motor power supply voltage system (the power supply lines PLc and PLr which are the second power supply lines) with a large amount of current, and the diodes provide a single power supply voltage. The system can be easily divided into two power supply voltage systems.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-4) in addition to the above (configuration G1-3).
(Configuration G1-4)
Said diode is a Schottky barrier diode.

The diodes D8E and D18C described above are Schottky barrier diodes. Since the Schottky barrier diode has a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the second power supply voltage, can be efficiently extracted from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the input power supply voltage. It is suitable as a current-consuming motor power source.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G2-1).
(Configuration G2-1)
The game machine 1 has a board provided with a first circuit for performing a light emitting effect and a second circuit for performing a movable body effect. A first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage to the first circuit as a first power supply voltage and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to the second circuit as a second power supply voltage are formed, The first power line and the second power line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 8) is assumed.
(Specific example 8)
・Board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・First circuit: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, and a circuit made up of electric parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., provided together with these for lighting effects ・Second circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and Along with these, electrical parts such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., provided for rendering the movable body, and circuits made up of conductor patterns ・First power supply line: power supply line PLa (see FIG. 56)
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLb (see FIG. 56)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Protection circuit: Power separation/protection circuit 671

In addition, in the case of this (structure G2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 9) is also assumed.
(Specific example 9)
・Board: front frame LED connection board 500
・First circuit: A circuit of electric parts such as wiring, resistors, capacitors, etc., related to signals for light emission, provided for light emission by LED boards downstream of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, CN10C ・Second Circuits: Motor drivers 510, 511, and circuits made up of electric parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., provided together with these for the production of movable bodies ・First power supply line: Power supply line PLp (see FIG. 57)
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLq (see FIG. 57)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Protection circuit: Power separation/protection circuit 521

In such a configuration (configuration G2-1), the power supply voltage of the LED system is stabilized by separating the power supply system of the LED system and the power system of the motor driver. That is, it is made difficult to mix power supply noise due to motor driving, and to prevent the influence of voltage fluctuation due to motor driving.
Although the LED is driven to emit light very frequently, the motor driver and its peripheral circuits are susceptible to the large current consumption by the motor. It is possible to prevent light emission from becoming unstable due to the influence of the power supply voltage system of the motor driver.

Further, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of Specific Example 8 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 9 separate the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) from the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). . In other words, it is not a power supply system that is branched into two systems on the substrate on the upstream side. Therefore, the number of power supply systems between the substrates on the upstream side can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and the number of connector pins can be reduced in design.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G2-2) in addition to the above (configuration G2-1).
(Configuration G2-2)
The board outputs the first power supply voltage to another board.

In the case of this (structure G2-2) as well, the above specific examples 6 and 7 can be mentioned.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of Specific Example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 7 apply a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the downstream board from the connector CN. output.
In the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600 , the downstream board is the side unit lower right LED board 620 and the side unit upper LED board 630 . In the case of the front frame LED connection board 500 , the relay board 550 (or the side unit upper right LED board 600 via the relay board 550 ) and the button LED connection board 640 .
Therefore, a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB), which is less affected by the power supply voltage system of the motor driver, can be used for the substrates on the downstream side as well.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G 2 -3) in addition to the above (configuration G 2 -1) or (configuration G 2 -2).
(Composition G2-3)
The protection circuit is a protection circuit using a diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line to the first power supply line.

Specific examples 8 and 9 of the above include power separation/protection circuits 671 and 521 corresponding to protection circuits. ing.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting operation from becoming unstable due to a reverse current from the motor driver power supply voltage system (the power supply lines PLb and PLq which are the second power supply lines), and the diode makes it possible to simplify the operation from one power supply voltage system. can be divided into two power supply voltage systems.

Schottky barrier diodes may be used as the diodes D7E and D19C.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-1).
(Configuration G3-1)
The game machine 1 has a board provided with a first circuit for performing a movable body effect, and a power supply voltage of a predetermined level input from another board is applied to the board as a first power supply voltage. A first power supply line for supplying a first circuit and a second power supply line for supplying the power supply voltage as a second power supply voltage to a performance motor driven by the first circuit are formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G3-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 10) is assumed.
(Specific example 10)
・Board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・First circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and circuits made up of electric parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. provided together with these for the production of movable objects ・Motor for production: Side unit lower right movable object motor 103 , side unit upper right movable object motor 104, etc. First power supply line: power supply line PLb (see FIG. 56)
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLc (see FIG. 56)
・Predetermined level power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power separation/protection circuit 670, 671

In the case of this (structure G3-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 11) is also assumed.
(Specific example 11)
・Board: front frame LED connection board 500
・First circuit: Motor drivers 510, 511, and circuits made up of electric parts and conductor patterns such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., provided together with these for the production of movable bodies ・Motor for production: Connector CN10, transmission line H15, button Motor/first power supply line (not shown) connected via connectors CN1G and CN3G (FIG. 33) of LED connection board 640: power supply line PLq (see FIG. 57)
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLr (see FIG. 57)
・Predetermined level power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power separation/protection circuit 520, 521

In such a configuration (configuration G2-1), the motor power supply system and the motor driver power supply system are separated via a protection circuit, thereby stabilizing the respective power supply voltages. That is, it avoids reverse current from the motor system to the power supply system of the motor driver due to large current driving and power supply noise.

Further, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of Specific Example 10 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 11 convert the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) into 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) and the motor drive voltage ( MOT12V) are separated. That is, it is not a power supply system that is branched into three systems on the substrate on the upstream side. Therefore, the number of power supply systems between the substrates on the upstream side can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and the number of connector pins can be reduced in design.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-2) in addition to the above (configuration G3-1).
(Configuration G3-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage are output to the outside of the substrate.

In the case of this (structure G3-2) as well, the above specific examples 10 and 11 can be cited.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of Specific Example 10 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 11 apply the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to the board downstream from the connector CN. Output to device. Therefore, the motor drive voltage is provided in an independent power supply voltage system also on the downstream side, and the influence on other power supply systems can be reduced.

A configuration example in which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to a motor driver on a downstream substrate is also conceivable. For example, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) may be supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 to the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit via the relay board 550 and used as the power supply voltage for the motor drivers 608 and 609 .

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-3) in addition to the above (configuration G3-1) or (configuration G3-2).
(Composition G3-3)
The protection circuit includes a protection circuit using a first diode for preventing reverse current from the first power supply line and a protection circuit using a second diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line. is provided.

In the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600 of Specific Example 10, the power separation/protection circuit 671 using the first diode D7E (see FIG. 29) from the power line PLb and the second diode D8E (see FIG. 29) from the power line PLc ) is provided.
In the case of the front frame LED connection board 500 of Specific Example 11, the power separation/protection circuit 521 using the first diode D19C (see FIG. 19) from the power line PLq and the second diode D18C (see FIG. 15) from the power line PLr. ) is provided.

This prevents the power supply of the motor driver from becoming unstable due to the reverse current from the power supply lines PLc and PLr (second power supply line) of the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the power supply for the motor with a large amount of current. can be done.
In addition, it is possible to prevent other power supply systems from becoming unstable due to reverse currents from the power supply lines PLb and PLq (first power supply lines) of 12V DC voltage (DC12VS), which is the power supply voltage of the motor driver.
In this case, one power supply voltage system can be easily divided into two power supply voltage systems by the first and second diodes.

Also, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-4) in addition to the above (configuration G3-3).
(Configuration G3-4)
The second diode is a Schottky barrier diode.

That is, the diode D8E (see FIG. 29) and the diode D18C (see FIG. 15) are Schottky barrier diodes.
Since the Schottky barrier diode has a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the second power supply voltage, can be efficiently extracted from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the input power supply voltage. It is suitable as a motor power source.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-5) in addition to the above (configuration G3-3).
(Configuration G3-5)
The second diode is a Schottky barrier diode, and the first diode has a higher forward voltage than the second diode.

That is, the diode D7E (see FIG. 29) and the diode D19C (see FIG. 19) are ordinary diodes having a higher forward voltage than the Schottky barrier diode. For example, a normal PN diode is used.
Schottky barrier diodes have good current efficiency due to their low forward voltage, but require a relatively large layout area on the substrate. For this reason, it is disadvantageous for alignment on the substrate and tends to cause an increase in substrate area. Therefore, a general diode with a small area is used on the motor driver side, which consumes less current than the motor. As a result, it is possible to prevent expansion of the required area, realize efficiency of substrate arrangement, and be advantageous in application to a small substrate.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-1).
(Configuration G4-1)
The game machine 1 has a first electrical component related to a first effect, a second electrical component related to a second effect, and a first board, and an input from an external board is input to the first board. a first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage of a predetermined level to the first electrical component as a first power supply voltage; a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to the second electrical component as a second power supply voltage; is formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit, and only one of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is supplied to the first power supply voltage. Output from the substrate to the second substrate.

In the case of this (configuration G4-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 12) is assumed. The first effect and the second effect can be any of the following: lighting effect by LED, movable object effect by motor/solenoid, etc., image display effect on liquid crystal panel, vibration effect, blower effect, sound effect, etc. However, in the following example, the first effect is the lighting effect, and the second effect is the movable body effect.

(Specific example 12)
・First board: front frame LED connection board 500
・Second board: relay board 550 and side unit upper right LED board 600
・First electrical component: Electrical components (circuit components and devices) related to lighting effects
・Second electric parts: Electric parts (circuit parts and devices) related to the production of movable bodies
・First power supply line: power supply line PLp
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLr or PLq
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
- Protection circuit: power supply isolation/protection circuit 520 or 521

Such (configuration G4-1) separates the power supply system via the power supply separation/protection circuit 520 or the power supply separation/protection circuit 521 at the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the board on the upstream side. . For example, the power line PLp and the power line PLr (or PLq) are separated. Then, only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the power supply line PLp is output to the relay board 550 (and the side unit upper right LED board 600) on the downstream side.
That is, while the required power supply system is formed within the substrate, one system of power supply voltage is supplied to the second substrate on the downstream side. This simplifies wiring between substrates (for example, transmission lines H9 and H10).

This configuration is very advantageous especially when the substrates are spaced apart. The front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, and the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are separated from each other by the relation between the lower left and the upper right of the game machine 1 as shown in FIG. do not have. In such a case, it is useful to be able to reduce the number of power supply systems.

By the way, the button LED connection board 640 can also be considered as the second board in this (configuration G4-1). This is an example of sending a second power supply voltage to a second substrate.
In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 outputs only the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) of the power supply line PLr to the button LED connection board 640 on the downstream side.
In other words, in this case also, the second substrate on the downstream side is supplied with a single power supply voltage, thereby simplifying the wiring between the substrates (for example, the transmission line H15).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-2) in addition to the above (configuration G4-1).
(Configuration G4-2)
The second substrate separates the one power supply voltage supplied from the first substrate into a plurality of power supply lines via a protection circuit.

The side unit upper right LED board 600 corresponds to the second board of this (configuration G4-2).
Side unit upper right LED board 600 receives a 12 V DC voltage (DC12VB) from front frame LED connection board 500, which is the first board, and supplies power supply lines PLa, PLb, and PLc through power separation/protection circuits 670 and 671. separated into

In other words, even if the transmission lines H9 and H10 are used as one power supply system, if the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is required on the downstream side, the power supply should be branched by the substrate on the downstream side. ing.
As a result, it is possible to supply only one power supply system with the transmission lines H9 and H10 without depending on the configuration on the downstream side.
This is useful when a part (side unit 10 in this example) that is replaced for each model has a substrate on the downstream side. In the side unit 10, there are models that are provided with a motor and models that are not provided with a motor. Of course, a power supply for the motor is not required for the model without a motor. In view of this, the transmission lines H9 and H10 can transmit power from one system, but this is not possible in the case of a model having a motor. Therefore, in the case of a model with a motor, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are also separated on the second board (side unit upper right LED board 600) side as needed.
In other words, the transmission lines H9 and H10 are simplified by separating the same kind of power supply voltage as the power supply voltage separated by the first board (front frame LED connection board 500) in the second board.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-3) in addition to the above (configuration G4-1) or (configuration G4-2).
(Configuration G4-3)
The second substrate is provided with a power supply line for driving the motor separated from the one power supply voltage supplied from the first substrate via a protection circuit.

The second board of this (configuration G4-3) corresponds to the side unit upper right LED board 600, which separates the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) of the power supply line PLc via the power supply separation/protection circuit 670. FIG.
When the motor drive voltage (MOT) is obtained, the power supply separation/protection circuit 670 prevents the backflow, thereby avoiding the influence of power supply noise and the like caused by the motor drive from affecting other power supply systems.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-1).
(Configuration G5-1)
The game machine 1 has a first electrical component related to a first effect, a second electrical component related to a second effect, and a first board, and an input from an external board is input to the first board. a first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage of a predetermined level to the first electrical component as a first power supply voltage; a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to the second electrical component as a second power supply voltage; is formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit, and both the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage are applied from the first substrate to the second substrate. output.

In the case of this (structure G5-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 13) is assumed. The first effect and the second effect can be any of the following: lighting effect by LED, movable object effect by motor/solenoid, etc., image display effect on liquid crystal panel, vibration effect, blower effect, sound effect, etc. However, in the following example, the first effect is the lighting effect, and the second effect is the movable body effect.

(Specific example 13)
・First board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: Side unit lower right LED board 620
・First electrical component: Electrical components (circuit components and devices) related to lighting effects
・Second electric parts: Electric parts (circuit parts and devices) related to the production of movable bodies
・First power supply line: power supply line PLa
・Second power supply line: power supply line PLc
・First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
・Protection circuit: Power separation/protection circuit 670

In such (configuration G5-1), both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) separated by the power separation/protection circuit 670 at the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit are transferred to the lower right side unit downstream. It is supplied to the LED substrate 620 (see FIG. 55).
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) power supply line PLa and a motor drive voltage (MOT12V) power supply line PLc are formed on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and power is supplied to the first electrical component and the second electrical component, respectively. can also be used in the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit on the downstream side.
This eliminates the need to provide a circuit for power supply separation (power supply separation/protection circuit 670) on the lower right LED board 620 side of the side unit, thereby simplifying the circuit configuration on the board.

Also, the configuration for transmitting both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is effective between substrates located relatively close to each other or between substrates included in the same unit.
The side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 are boards arranged in close positions as shown in FIG. 8, and the length of the transmission line H11 is also short. All of these are substrates arranged in the side unit 10 and are usually handled in units of the side unit 10 . In other words, even if the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit and the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit have a slightly complicated wiring configuration or a large number of lines, this is not a disadvantageous situation. On the contrary, the advantage of providing the power separation/protection circuit 670 for power separation only on the upper right LED board 600 side of the side unit is greater. For this reason, the plurality of separated power supply systems are transmitted downstream as they are, so that the plurality of power supply systems can be used as they are on the substrates on the downstream side.
In addition, the power separation/protection circuit 670 prevents the power noise of the motor power supply system from flowing into the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for lighting effects, thereby stabilizing the LED light emission operation. The effect of stabilizing the LED light emission operation is also obtained on the lower right LED board 620 side of the side unit.

Such (configuration G5-1) is different from the above-described (configuration G4-1) in the above points. An example of applying (configuration G4-1) is the front frame LED connection board 500 and the relay board 550 (and the side unit upper right LED board 600), but this is between boards separated by a distance as described above. that makes it more effective.
On the other hand, (configuration G5-1) can be said to be a configuration suitable for substrates that are close together or substrates that are handled collectively.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-2) in addition to the above (configuration G5-1).
(Configuration G5-2)
The second electrical component is an electrical component that consumes more current than the first electrical component.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the first electrical component is the electrical component related to the lighting effect, and the second electrical component is the electrical component related to the movable body effect. In this case, the first electrical component is an LED, an LED driver, their peripheral circuit components, and the like, and the second electrical component is a device such as a motor, a solenoid, a motor driver, their peripheral circuit components, and the like. That is, the second electrical component consumes a large amount of power.
By separating the power supply system for the second electrical component as the power supply line PLa, the influence on the operation of the first electrical component can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-3) in addition to the above (configuration G5-1) or (configuration G5-2).
(Configuration G5-3)
The second substrate also has the first electrical component and the second electrical component.

A side unit lower right LED board 620 corresponding to the second board has an LED light emitting portion 622 and an LED driver 621 corresponding to the first electric component (see FIG. 31). It also has a connector CN1F corresponding to the second electrical component. The connector CN1F in this case constitutes a circuit for the side unit lower right movable object motor 103 .
In this way, the side unit lower right LED board 620 is a board that uses both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and these are suitable for transmission.

By the way, the configurations described above from (configuration G1-1) to (configuration G5-3) also have the aspect of dividing the power supply system according to the application.
For example, the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit uses the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for both LED emission driving and motor driving.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 29, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). This 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are prevented from affecting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by diode D7E and Schottky barrier diode D8E.

12V motor driving voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used in motor drivers 608 and 609 in FIG.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the LED driver 605 uses a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to drive the light emitting portion 612 to emit light.
Thus, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is the power supply voltage for the LEDs and LED drivers.
A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is a power supply voltage for motor drive.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is a power supply voltage for the motor driver.
By dividing the 12V power supply system for each application like these, mutual influence is avoided. For example, conventionally, if the LED power supply voltage is used as it is for a motor driver, the motor driver may fail. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, the power supply system is divided according to the application.

In addition, even when a large current is instantaneously consumed by driving the motor of the movable object, the number of lines for the power supply voltage in the transmission line H10 is reduced while stabilizing the LED light emission so as not to affect the LED light emission. I am making it possible.

[6.8 Number of power lines and number of ground lines]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-1).
(Configuration H1-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board provided with a circuit and an output side connector related to the drive control of the effect device, a second board provided with a circuit and an input side connector related to the drive control of the effect device, and an output a wiring for electrically connecting the side connector and the input side connector, wherein each of the connectors and the wiring connects a power terminal of a first system and a power terminal of a second system different from the first system. , a ground terminal and a drive signal terminal, where N is the number of power supply terminals of the first system, M is the number of power supply terminals of the second system, and L is the number of ground terminals. , N+M>L.

In this (configuration H1-1), a corresponding example (specific example 14) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 14)
・First substrate: LED connection substrate 700
・Second board: board back bottom relay board 800
・Output side connector: Connector CN11J (see Fig. 40)
・Input side connector: Connector CN1Q (see Fig. 46)
・Wiring: Transmission line H30
・Power supply terminals of the 1st system: 4th pin, 6th pin (number N = 2)
・Second system power supply terminals: 7th pin, 9th pin (number M = 2)
・Ground terminals: 1st pin, 15th pin, 16th pin (number L = 3)
・Circuits related to the drive control of the performance device: electric parts, wiring, etc. that make up the LED drive circuit system from the LED connection board 700 to the decoration board 820

In such a configuration (H1-1), the number of ground lines (number of terminals) is smaller than the number of power supply lines (number of terminals) in accordance with the current consumption on the downstream side.
FIG. 58 shows the LED connection board 700, the underboard relay board 800, and the transmission of the power supply system to the downstream side thereof.
From the connector CN11J of the LED connection board 700 to the connector CN1Q of the lower relay board 800, 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted through two lines as the power supply voltage of the first system, and 2V as the power supply voltage of the second system. A motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted through this line. The number of ground lines is three.

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the decoration board 820 by six lines downstream from the board back lower relay board 800 by the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31.
Also, a motor driving voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted to the movable object motor 830 from the connector CN2Q.
Also, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the position detection switch 831 from the connector CN4Q.

Consider the transmission line H30 and the connectors CN11J and CN1Q at both ends thereof.
As a basic design, when there are four lines for power supply, there are also four lines for ground.
This is because a plurality of types of power supply voltages are supplied with the number of lines satisfying the current consumption of each, but the number of ground lines may be sufficient for the total current consumption.
In addition, the board rear bottom relay board 800, the LED connection board 700, and the like are boards having a laminated structure of multiple layers, and also have a layer in which a ground is commonly formed as a so-called solid ground, in which conductors are coated over a wide area. . A plurality of pins assigned to the ground in the connector CN11J and the connector CN1Q are connected to the common ground in the board. Thus, one pin and line assigned to ground is not dedicated ground for each power supply. Unless otherwise specified, it is conceivable that the ground pin of the connector and the common ground are connected to other substrates.

Assume that one line can handle 1A (ampere).
Consider the maximum current consumption on the downstream side. In this case, it is the sum of the maximum amount of current used by the decorative board 820, the maximum amount of current used by the movable object motor 830, and the maximum amount of current used by the position detection switch 831. FIG.
For example, the sum of the current consumption of the decoration board 820 and the position detection switch 831 of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system is 1.3A, and the current consumption of the movable object motor 830 of the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) system is 1.6A. Then, each power supply system requires two lines. For this reason, there are four of each two.
However, in this case, since the total grounding is 2.9A, the number of lines for grounding is only three.

In other words, in the LED connection board 700, the transmission line H30, and the underboard relay board 800, the two types of power supply voltages are set to four by setting the number of lines according to the respective current consumptions. The number of lines is set to three by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum current consumption.
This reduces the number of lines required for power supply.
Also, by reducing the number of wirings between substrates and the number of terminals of the connector CN, cost reduction and space saving are realized.

In the above (configuration H1-1), an example corresponding to the following (specific example 15) is also assumed.
(Specific example 15)
・First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
・Second board: front frame LED connection board 500
・Output side connector: Connector CN2B (see Fig. 13)
・Input side connector: Connector CN2C (see Fig. 15)
・Wiring: Transmission line H8
・Power supply terminals of the first system: 27th pin, 28th pin, 29th pin, 30th pin (number N=4)
・Second system power supply terminals: 1st pin, 3rd pin (number M = 2)
・Ground terminals: 5th pin, 7th pin, 8th pin, 17th pin, 18th pin (Number L=5)
・Circuits related to the drive control of the production device: electric parts, wiring, etc. that make up the LED drive circuit system from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the front frame LED connection board 500

In this case also, by knowing the current consumption on the downstream side, the number of power supply lines (number of terminals) that combines the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the first system and the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) of the second system is six. However, the configuration is such that the number of ground lines (the number of terminals) is reduced to five.

That is, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, the transmission line H8, and the front frame LED connection board 500, the two types of power supply voltages are set to six lines by setting the number of lines according to the respective consumption currents. is set to 5 by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum current consumption.
This reduces the number of lines required for power supply.
Also, by reducing the number of wirings between substrates and the number of terminals of the connector CN, cost reduction and space saving are realized.
Further, in this case, the transmission line H8 constitutes wiring between the inner frame 2 and the door 6 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the effect of being able to reduce the number of lines is great.
In addition, since it is the opening/closing portion of the door 6, it is likely to cause restrictions on arrangement and height of parts depending on the operation. For this reason, the connectors CN2B and CN2C are both parts that are desired to be miniaturized, and it is extremely effective in terms of design to be able to reduce the number of terminals of the connectors CN2B and CN2C.

By the way, considering the following (specific example 16), three power supply systems are provided.
(Specific example 16)
・First board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・Second board: Side unit lower right LED board 620
・Output side connector: Connector CN3E (see Fig. 26)
・Input side connector: Connector CN3F (see Fig. 30)
・Wiring: Transmission line H11
・Power supply terminal of the first system (DC12VB): Pin 11 (number = 1)
・Power supply terminal of 2nd system (MOT12V): 15th pin (number = 1)
・Power supply terminal of the 3rd system (DC5V): 1st pin (number = 1)
・Ground terminal: 8th pin, 13th pin (number = 2)

For the side unit lower right LED board 620 of FIG. )), and the number of ground lines is two. This also has the effect of reducing the number of lines.

Therefore, the technology realized in specific examples 14 and 15 has wiring for electrically connecting the first substrate, the second substrate, the output side connector and the input side connector in (configuration H1-1), It can also be said that each of the connectors and the wiring satisfies the relationship of X>L, where X is the number of power supply terminals and L is the number of ground terminals of the plurality of systems.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-2) in addition to the above (configuration H1-1).
(Configuration H1-2)
The number of ground terminals is the smallest among integers larger than the sum of the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the first system and the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the second system divided by the rated current value of the connector terminal. It is considered as the number of values.

In other words, according to Specific Example 14, the sum of the maximum current consumption of each system = 2.9A, and the rated current value of the connector terminal is 1A, so 2.9÷1 = 2.9. is set to "3", which is the number of minimum values among the larger integers.
This is the configuration with the highest wiring efficiency.
The case of specific example 15 can also be considered in the same way.

Even when the first, second, and third power sources are provided as in Example 16, the number of ground terminals is determined by dividing the sum of the maximum current consumption of each power source by the rated current value of the connector terminal. Wiring efficiency is maximized by setting the minimum number of integers larger than the number.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-3) in addition to the above (configuration H1-1) or (configuration H1-2).
(Configuration H1-3)
The power supply of the first system and the power supply of the second system are separated on the first substrate via a protection circuit.

In the case of Example 14, as shown in FIG. 36, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the power separation/protection circuit 790 . As a result, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as a power supply voltage with overvoltage protection and reverse current prevention. Therefore, the LED light emission circuit system in the LED connection board 700, the underboard relay board 800, and the decoration board 820 is isolated from power supply noise and the like caused by the motor drive voltage system, and stable light emission operation is performed.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-4) in the above (configuration H1-3).
(Configuration H1-4)
The protection circuit is configured using a Schottky barrier diode.

The power isolation/protection circuit 790 described above uses a Schottky barrier diode D5J. Since the Schottky barrier diode has a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) can be efficiently extracted from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), making it suitable as a motor power supply with relatively large current consumption.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H2-1).
(Configuration H2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes a first board provided with a circuit and an output side connector related to the drive control of the effect device, a second board provided with a circuit and an input side connector related to the drive control of the effect device, and an output a wiring for electrically connecting the side connector and the input side connector, wherein each of the connectors and the wiring connects a power terminal of a first system and a power terminal of a second system different from the first system. , a ground terminal and a drive signal terminal, where N is the number of power supply terminals of the first system, M is the number of power supply terminals of the second system, and L is the number of ground terminals. , N+M>L, and the power supply of the first system and the power supply of the second system have different voltages.

The above-described (specific example 15) applies to such (configuration H2-1).
In other words, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, the transmission line H8, and the front frame LED connection board 500, there are two types of voltages, the first system 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the second system 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). The number of power supply voltages is set to 6 by setting the number of lines according to the current consumption of each, while the number of ground lines is set to 5 by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum consumption current.
As a result, the number of lines required for power supply can be reduced, the number of wires between boards can be reduced, and the number of terminals of the connector CN can be reduced, thereby realizing cost reduction and space saving. As described above, the transmission line H8 constitutes the wiring between the inner frame 2 and the door 6, and since the transmission line H8 has movement accompanying the opening and closing of the door 6 and is exposed wiring, these effects are extremely effective in terms of design. , and it also leads to operational stability.
In particular, since two types of power supply systems with different voltages are used for transmission, an increase in the number of lines is unavoidable to some extent.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H2-2) in addition to the above (configuration H2-1).
(Configuration H2-2)
The number of ground terminals is the smallest among integers larger than the sum of the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the first system and the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the second system divided by the rated current value of the connector terminal. It is considered as the number of values.

That is, according to Example 15, if the sum of the maximum current consumption of the first system and the second system is 4.8 A, and the rated current value of the connector terminal is 1 A, then 4.8/1=4.8. , and the number of ground terminals is set to "5," which is the minimum number of integers larger than that. This is the configuration with the highest wiring efficiency.

[6.9 Buffer and signal branch]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J1). FIG. 59 shows the configuration of this (configuration J1) “substrate”.
(Configuration J1)
The gaming machine 1 has a first electric component EP related to a first effect, and a first board for relaying the effect control signal to other boards. A first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing and is supplied to the first electrical component EP, and a performance control signal that is output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electrical component EP are branched and input, and the buffer processing is performed. and a second buffer circuit BF2 which is used as an effect control signal to be supplied to another board.

In this (configuration J1), the following corresponding example (specific example 17) is assumed.
(Specific example 17)
・Production control signal: Clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A)
・First board: side unit upper right LED board 600
・Other board: LED board 630 on the side unit
- First electrical component EP: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, etc. (see FIG. 27)
- First buffer circuit BF1: buffer circuit 601 (see FIG. 25)
- Second buffer circuit BF2: buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26)

The signal paths of the effect control signals, that is, the clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), the data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), and the reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A) in the side unit upper right LED board 600 shown in FIGS. 60.

The clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P input to the connector CN1E are first buffered by the buffer circuit 601 at the input stage. The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, which are the outputs of the buffer circuit 601 , are branched and supplied to the buffer circuit 604 , the LED driver 605 and the LED driver 606 .

The LED driver 605 drives the light emitting unit 612 to emit light based on the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, thereby realizing a light emitting effect.

The buffer circuit 604 branches the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A into two systems and inputs them to different terminals. That is, a system of terminals A1, A2 and A3 and a system of terminals A5, A6 and A7 (see FIG. 26).
The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A input to the A1, A2, and A3 terminals are buffered and supplied from the Y1, Y2, and Y3 terminals to the connector CN2E, where the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal are output. It is supplied as a signal RESET to the LED board 630 on the side unit via the transmission line H12.

The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A input to the A5, A6, and A7 terminals of the buffer circuit 604 are buffered and supplied from the Y5, Y6, and Y7 terminals to the connector CN3E, where the clock signal CLK and data Signal DATA and reset signal RESET are supplied to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit via the transmission line H11.

The LED driver 606 converts the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, which are serial data, into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to the motor drivers 608 and 609 via the buffer circuit 607 . The motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1-/1, MOT1-/2 generated by the motor drivers 608 and 609 are output from the connector CN3E and connected to the lower right LED board 620 of the downstream side unit. Realize motor drive.

As can be clearly seen from FIG. 60, the above (structure J1) has the structure of FIG. 59 as the 17th concrete example.
That is, the side unit upper right LED board 600 relays the effect control signal to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630, and also performs LED light emission driving itself (the LED driver 605 is mounted). In this case, the effect control signal from the upstream is buffered by the buffer circuit 601, branched for the LED driver 605 and the downstream side unit LED board 630, and further buffered by the buffer circuit 604. supply downstream.

Therefore, the signal attenuation up to the input is compensated by the buffer circuit 601, and stable operation of the LED driver 605 is realized. Furthermore, by compensating the signal in the buffer circuit 604 at the output stage before relaying it downstream, it is possible to transmit a stable signal to the downstream side as well.
Particularly in the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600 , the effect control signal is supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 with a long line length and via the relay board 550 . Signal compensation by the buffer circuit 601 is an appropriate process because the attenuation due to the long line length on the path and passing through the four connectors CN3C, CN1D, CN2D, and CN1E is relatively large.
Further, signal compensation of the buffer circuit 604 is an appropriate process for performing stable signal transmission from the connector CN2E of the output stage to the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit after branching internally.

FIG. 59 shows damping resistors Rd1 and Rd2. That is, the effect control signal is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.
Also, the effect control signal output from the second buffer circuit BF2 is output via the damping resistor Rd2.

In the case of the concrete example 17, the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E shown in FIG. 24 correspond to the damping resistor Rd1.
Damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E shown in FIG. 26 correspond to damping resistor Rd2.

The clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 after reducing noise and suppressing overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data by damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E. It is processed. As a result, the signal is compensated while maintaining the quality of the waveform, which is preferable in terms of suppressing signal degradation.
The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 604, and then damped by damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E to reduce noise and suppress overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data. is output after This is preferable in terms of maintaining the waveform quality of the effect control signal transferred downstream and suppressing signal deterioration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-1). FIG. 61 shows the configuration of the "first substrate" of this (configuration J2-1).
(Composition J2-1)
It has a first electric component EP related to a first effect, and a first board for relaying effect control signals to a plurality of other boards, wherein the first board controls effects input from an input side connector CNin. It has a first buffer circuit BF1 that buffers a signal and supplies it to the first electrical component EP, and the effect control signal that is output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electrical component EP is branched and wired, A plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 for performing buffer processing on the plurality of systems of performance control signals relayed to the plurality of other boards, and a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21. , and BF22, and a plurality of output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 for outputting a plurality of effect control signals output from the BF22 to the other substrates different from each other.

In this (configuration J2-1), the following corresponding example (specific example 18) is assumed.
(Specific example 18)
・Input side connector CNin: Connector CN1E
・Multiple output side connectors CNout1, CNout2: connectors CN2E, CN3E
・Production control signal: Clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A)
・First board: side unit upper right LED board 600
A plurality of other boards: side unit lower right LED board 620, side unit upper LED board 630
- First electrical component EP: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, etc. (see FIG. 27)
- First buffer circuit BF1: buffer circuit 601 (see FIG. 25)
- Second buffer circuits BF21, BF22: buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26)

As can be clearly seen from FIG. 60, this specific example 18 has the configuration of FIG. 61 as the above (configuration J2-1).

In other words, the side unit upper right LED board 600 relays the effect control signal to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630 and the side unit lower right LED board 620, and also performs LED light emission driving itself (LED driver 605 is installed). ing).
In this case, the effect control signal from the upstream from the connector CN1E is buffered by the buffer circuit 601 and then branched for the LED driver 605 and downstream, and further the functions of the first and second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are After being buffered by the buffer circuit 604, the signals are supplied downstream from the connectors CN2E and CN3E.

Therefore, the buffer circuit 601 compensates for the signal attenuation up to the input, realizing stable operation of the LED driver 605 . Furthermore, by compensating the signal in the buffer circuit 604 at the output stage before relaying it downstream, it is possible to transmit a stable signal to the downstream side as well. Especially in the case of the side unit upper right LED board 600, considering that the effect control signal is supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 via the relay board 550 with a long line length, the long line length and the four connectors CN3C , CN1D, CN2D, and CN1E, the attenuation is relatively large, so signal compensation by the buffer circuit 601 is an appropriate process.

Furthermore, after branching internally, the production control signal is branched to a plurality of downstream boards, and stable signal transmission is performed from the output stage connectors CN2E and CN3E to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630 and side unit lower right LED board 620. Signal compensation in buffer circuit 604 would be the appropriate process to do so.

In addition, in the buffer circuit 601, buffer processing is performed at the stage of the common effect control signal before branching, so that it is efficient to compensate for the attenuation in the transmission line up to that point, and the efficiency of the circuit configuration can be improved. There is also the aspect of

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-2) in addition to the above (configuration J2-1).
(Configuration J2-2)
A performance control signal input from the input side connector CNin is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via a damping resistor Rd1.

In the case of the eighteenth specific example, the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E shown in FIG. 24 correspond to the damping resistor Rd1.
The clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 after reducing noise and suppressing overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data by damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E. It is processed. As a result, the signal is compensated while maintaining the quality of the waveform, which is preferable in terms of suppressing signal deterioration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-3) in addition to the above (configuration J2-1) and (configuration J2-2).
(Composition J2-3)
The effect control signals output from the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are supplied to output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 via damping resistors Rd2 and Rd3.

In the case of Specific Example 18, the damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E shown in FIG. 26 correspond to the damping resistor Rd2, and the damping resistors R24E, R25E, and R26E correspond to the damping resistor Rd3.
The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 604, and then damped by the damping resistors R18E, R19E, R20E, R24E, R25E, and R26E to reduce noise and prevent overshoot in the waveform as serial data. , are output from the connectors CN2E and CN3E after suppressing undershoot. This is preferable in terms of maintaining the waveform quality of the effect control signal transferred downstream and suppressing signal deterioration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (structure J3-1). FIG. 62 shows the configuration of the "first substrate" of this (configuration J3-1).
(Composition J3-1)
It has a first electric component EP related to a first effect, and a first board for relaying effect control signals to a plurality of other boards, wherein the first board controls effects input from an input side connector CNin. It has a first buffer circuit BF1 that buffers a signal and supplies it to the first electrical component EP, and the effect control signal that is output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electrical component EP is branched and wired, A plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 for performing buffer processing on the plurality of systems of performance control signals relayed to the plurality of other boards, and a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21. , and BF22 to output a plurality of effect control signals to the other substrates different from each other, and the plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are connected to the plurality of systems. It is formed by a one-chip circuit that inputs a performance control signal from another terminal, buffers each signal, and outputs from another terminal.

In this (configuration J3-1), the above-described (specific example 18) is assumed, and the buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26) is a one-chip circuit having the functions of the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22.
As a result, in addition to obtaining the same effect as the above (structure J2-1), by adopting a one-chip structure, it is possible to reduce the substrate area, facilitate layout design, and the like.
60, the buffer circuit 604 divides the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A into two systems, one for terminals A1, A2, and A3, and one for terminals A5, A6, and A7. branched system. In other words, the input terminal of the chip is effectively used to branch into two systems, and the performance control signals of the respective systems are buffered. As a result, the configuration for branching can be simplified, and signal compensation can be performed appropriately in each system.

Note that the buffer circuit 761 in FIG. 44 buffers the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C and then transmits them to the two LED substrates on the downstream side from the connectors CN2M and CN3M. This is also an example of branching into two systems using the input terminal of the buffer circuit 604 .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-2) in addition to the above (configuration J3-1).
(Composition J3-2)
A performance control signal input from the input side connector CNin is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via a damping resistor Rd1.
As a result, the same effect as the above-described (structure J2-2) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-3) in addition to the above (configuration J3-1) and (configuration J3-2).
(Composition J3-3)
The effect control signals output from the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are supplied to output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 via damping resistors Rd2 and Rd3.
As a result, the same effect as the above (structure J2-3) can be obtained.

[6.10 Power supply by electric parts]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-1).
(Configuration K1-1)
The game machine 1 has a board provided with a first electrical component and a second electrical component related to a first effect. A terminal for outputting a low second voltage is provided, and the second electrical component is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage.

In this (configuration K1-1), a corresponding example (specific example 19) is assumed as follows. Each component of Example 14 is described in FIG.
(Specific example 19)
・Substrate: LED substrate 780A
・First electric component: LED driver 782
- Second electrical component: buffer circuit 781
・First voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
- Second voltage: a reference voltage Vref of 5V
・Terminal for outputting the second voltage: Terminal VREF

FIG. 63 shows the configuration of the LED substrate 780A. This LED board 780A is a modification of the LED board 780 shown in FIG.
In this case, the connector CN1N' has four terminals from the first pin to the fourth pin as indicated by the numbers "1" to "4". ), the second pin is a clock signal CLK terminal, the third pin is a data signal DATA terminal, and the fourth pin is a ground terminal.
Needless to say, the terminal configuration of the substrate on the upstream side is also changed accordingly.

As can be seen by comparison with FIG. 45, the case of FIG. 63 is an example in which a 5V DC voltage (5V DC) is not supplied. However, a buffer circuit 781 having a power supply voltage of 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is mounted in the same manner as in FIG.

The LED driver 782 uses a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as a power supply voltage, and the terminal VREF is configured to output a 5V reference voltage Vref. The reference voltage Vref is used for setting the LED driver 782, and is applied to the terminal CTLSCT, the terminal RESET, the terminal A0, and the terminal A1 in this case.

A terminal CTLSCT is a serial bus communication setting terminal, and a terminal voltage (L/H) selects whether to set a 3-wire serial bus signal as an input signal or set a 2-wire serial bus signal as an input signal.
A terminal RESET is a reset signal input terminal, and is reset at L level.
Terminals A0, A1, A2, A3, and A4 are slave address setting terminals, and a 5-bit slave address of the LED driver 782 itself is set. In the case of this LED driver 782, for example, a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminals A0 and A1, and terminals A2, A3, and A4 are grounded, thereby setting a slave address of "11000."

In the case of FIG. 63, this reference voltage Vref is used as the power supply voltage of buffer circuit 781 .
As a result, the efficiency of the power supply configuration is realized, and the need for inputs from a plurality of power supply voltage systems is eliminated. Since the input of 5V DC voltage (5V DC) is unnecessary, the simplification of the connector CN1N' on the input side can also be realized.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-2) in addition to the above (configuration K1-1).
(Configuration K1-2)
The first electrical component is an LED driver and a first voltage is used to drive the LED.

Although the LED driver 782 is used as the first electric component in Specific Example 19, the LED driver 782 drives the LED of the light emitting section 783 to emit light. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the first voltage, is used to drive the LED of the light emitting section 783 to emit light.
As a result, the LED board 780A of FIG. 63 can operate the LED driver 782, drive the light emission of the light emitting unit 783, and operate the buffer circuit 781 only by inputting a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB). be suitable.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-3) in addition to the above (configuration K1-1) (configuration K1-2).
(Configuration K1-3)
The substrate is supplied with the first voltage from another substrate and is not supplied with the second voltage.

As described in the description of the connector CN1N' in FIG. 63, only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the upstream board, and the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. This provides a configuration that can simplify the power supply wiring.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-4) in addition to the above (configuration K1-1) (configuration K1-2) (configuration K1-3).
(Configuration K1-4)
The first electric component is a driver circuit of a performance device and is one of a plurality of driver circuits set with different slave addresses, and the first electric component sets the second voltage to its own slave address setting. I am using

The LED driver 782, which is the first electrical component, is configured to apply the reference voltage Vref, which is the second voltage, to terminals A1 and A2 for setting the slave address. In other words, the voltage used for setting the address of the LED driver 782 is used as the power supply voltage in the buffer circuit 781 . This is a configuration that promotes the efficiency of the power supply configuration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K2).
(Configuration K2)
The game machine 1 has a board provided with a first electrical component and a second electrical component related to a first effect. a terminal for outputting a low second voltage, the second electrical component is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage, the first electrical component is a driver circuit of a performance device, and the first The second electric component is a buffer circuit that buffers effect control signals that are output to other boards.

Specific example 19 described above corresponds to this (configuration K2).
The LED board 780A in FIG. 63 has a role as a relay board for the downstream LED board 790, and a role as a board for driving LED light emission. In such a case, a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB) is used to drive the LED driver 782 and light emission of the light emitting unit 783, and the reference voltage Vref as the second voltage is applied to the buffer circuit for signal compensation of the effect control signal downstream. Used in 781. This makes it possible to simplify the power supply configuration with a board having both functions of a relay board for effect control signals and a drive board for effect.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K3).
(Configuration K3)
The game machine 1 includes a first electric component to which a performance control signal supplied from another board is input, a second electric component to which the performance control signal is branched and input in parallel with the first electric component, is provided, the first electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage, and has a terminal for outputting a second voltage lower than the first voltage, the second electrical component comprises the first It is configured to operate with two voltages as power supply voltages.

Specific example 19 described above corresponds to this (configuration K3).
The LED board 780A of FIG. 63 is a board that branches the clock signal and the data signal DATA that are the input effect control signals, supplies them to the LED driver 782, and transmits them downstream via the buffer circuit 781. In this case, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used to drive the LED driver 782, and the reference voltage Vref as the second voltage is used in the buffer circuit 781 for signal compensation of the downstream effect control signal. This makes it possible to simplify the power supply configuration in the circuit board that branches the effect control signal and processes it in parallel.

[6.11 Others]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment further has the following various configurations.

(Configuration Z1)
The LED board 780 in FIG. 45 receives 5V DC voltage (DC5V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as power supply voltages from the upstream relay board 760 via the connector CN1N.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply for the buffer circuit 781, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply for the LED driver 782. FIG.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is output from the connector CN2N to the downstream LED board 790 (see FIG. 11).
As a result, the efficiency of power supply can be improved.

(Configuration Z2)
The inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG. 13 outputs a signal for controlling the effect from the effect control board 30 to each board of the door 6, but the signal for the speaker 46 is also included.

In this case, the signals for effect control are: clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clear signal CLR_L, clear signal CLR_M, clock signal CLK_L, clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, data signal DATA_M, general purpose Output port, enable signal ENABLE_M.

The signals for the speaker 46 are +terminal and -terminal signals for the upper right speaker, the middle right speaker, the lower right speaker, the upper left speaker, and the middle left speaker of the 19th to 26th pins of the connector CN1B.
Also, the 19th to 26th pins of the connector CN2B are signals for the speaker.

Here, the 17th and 18th pins of both the connectors CN1B and CN2B are grounded.
As a result, in the transmission line H7, connector CN1B, connector CN2B, and transmission line H8 system, a ground is provided between the speaker signal, that is, the audio signal, and the above-mentioned signal for controlling the performance, that is, the high frequency signal. It will be.
This makes it possible to obtain a shielding effect and reduce the influence of the high frequency noise generated by the high frequency signal for effect control on the audio signal.
Moreover, as a result, the signal for effect control and the speaker signal can be transmitted through the same wiring, thereby improving the wiring efficiency.

(Configuration Z3)
Harnesses that are connected to movable bodies often use flexible cables that do not easily break even when repeatedly moved, or wires that are softer than usual.
Compared to ordinary wires, soft wires are characterized by high durability, high price, and almost the same current flow. On the other hand, flexible cables are characterized by high price and low current flow.
Due to the structure of the movable body, the harness flexes greatly, and flexible cables are used when it is desired to control the direction of flexion. This is because it is difficult to control the deflection of a soft wire.

(Configuration Z4)
Connectors CN1C and CN4C in FIG. 16 will be described.
Downstream of the front frame LED connection board 500, there are two LED boards (an LED board (not shown) and an in-handle LED board) connected to the connectors CN1C and CN4C. In this case, one of the two LED boards carries an LED driver. As described above, the front frame LED connection board 500 transmits a signal for LED control from the connector CN1C to the LED driver of one of the LED boards, while the LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17- G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) are received and transmitted from the connector CN4C to the other LED board.

That is, when there are two LED boards (second and third boards) downstream of the first board (front frame LED connection board 500), and an LED driver is mounted on one of them (second board), the A driving control signal is transmitted from the first substrate 500, and part of the LED driving signal is returned from the LED driver of the second substrate and relayed to the other LED substrate (third substrate).

As a result, only one LED driver is required for driving the second and third substrates, which facilitates simplification of the configuration and miniaturization of downstream LED substrates.
In addition, since the light emission is controlled by the common control signal, it is sufficient to send the drive control signal only from the first substrate to the second substrate, and the wiring efficiency is good.
In addition, by relaying with the first board, a harness between the second board and the third board becomes unnecessary.

(Configuration Z5)
As shown in FIGS. 36, 39, 40 and 41, in the LED connection board 700, the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_P) and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_P) is transferred downstream via the buffer circuit 703 and the buffer circuit (one of 705, 706, 707 and 708).

That is, the clock signal CLK_P and the serial data signal DATA_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 703 to be the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 706 in FIG. 40 and output from the connector CN7J as the clock signal CLK_E and the serial data signal DATA_E.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 705 of FIG. 39 and output from the connector CN10J as the clock signal CLK_B and the serial data signal DATA_B.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 707 in FIG. 41 and output from the connector CN9J as the clock signal CLK_D and the serial data signal DATA_D.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 708 in FIG. 41 and output from the connector CN8J as the clock signal CLK_C and the serial data signal DATA_C.

In this way, the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are first buffered at the receiving stage, branched into four systems, and buffered at the output stage of each system before being output.
When the input signal is branched and output to a plurality of systems in this way, stable signal transmission is realized by performing buffer processing at the input stage and at each output stage of the plurality of systems.

The embodiments have been described above, but the configuration examples from (configuration A1-1) to (configuration Z5) can be combined in various ways, and by combining them arbitrarily, the effects described in each configuration can be obtained. It can be a game machine 1 that has both.
In addition, it is also possible to combine the configurations and operations described in the embodiments.
Moreover, the various illustrated specific examples are merely one aspect of realizing each configuration. Various specific examples that are not particularly specified are also conceivable.

Moreover, although the embodiment has been described with a pachinko game machine, the present invention can also be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a so-called slot game machine.
The reel-type game machine also has a frame member, a door member provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame member, and a replacement member attached to the frame member so as to be replaceable.
For example, a reel-type game machine has a frame housing as a structure corresponding to a frame member, a door as a structure corresponding to a door member, and a reel unit as a structure corresponding to a replacement member. For example, the frame housing constitutes the main body of the reel-type game machine, and the reel unit is attached to the frame housing directly or via sheet metal or the like by screwing or the like, so that it can be replaced. The door is attached to the frame housing so as to be openable and closable.
Also in such a reel-type game machine, the board configuration, circuit configuration, connector configuration, power supply configuration, etc. described in each embodiment can be employed.

1 game machine 2 inner frame 3 game board 4 outer frame 6 door 10 side unit 13 effect button 15a cross key 15b enter button 20 main control board 30 effect control board 300 power board 400 inner frame LED relay board 500 front frame LED connection board 501 , 502, 503, 504, 507, 508, 512, 513, 601, 604, 607, 703, 704, 705, 706, 707, 708, 741, 761, 781 Buffer circuits 505, 506, 602, 603, 701, 702 P/S conversion circuit 509, 605, 606, 621, 631, 661, 663, 742, 782 LED driver 510, 511, 608, 609, 710, 711, 712, 713, 714, 715, 716 Motor driver 520, 521, 670, 671, 790 Power separation/protection circuit 550 Relay board 600 Side unit upper right LED board 620 Side unit lower right LED board 630 Side unit upper LED board 640 Button LED connection board 660 Button LED board 700 LED connection board 720 Board back Left relay board 740 Decorative board 760 Relay board 780, 780', 790 LED board 800 Bottom back board relay board 820 Decorative board 840 Frame LED relay board

Claims (1)

A first electrical component to which a performance control signal supplied from another board is input;
a second electrical component into which the effect control signal is branched and input in parallel with the first electrical component;
having a substrate provided with
The first electrical component operates using a first voltage as a power supply voltage and has a terminal for outputting a second voltage lower than the first voltage,
The first electric component is a driver circuit of a performance device, and is one of a plurality of driver circuits set with different slave addresses,
the first electrical component uses the second voltage for its own slave address setting;
The second electrical component is connected to a terminal that outputs the second voltage.
game machine.

Images